Service Manual: Published in Aug '04 2DA70761 Revision 1

KM-1650/2050
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in Aug ’04
2DA70761
Revision 1
CAUTION
DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH
THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
ATTENTION
IL Y A DANGER D’EXPLOSION S’IL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE.
REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MÊME TYPE OU D’UN TYPE REC-
OMMANDÉ PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RÉBUT LES BATTERIES USAGÉES
CONFORMÉMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.
Revision history
Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks

1 June 25, 2004 Overall revised -
- - - -
- - - -
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING:Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point
of attention is shown inside the symbol.
General warning.
Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action.
Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required.
Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.

1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check
that it is adequate for the rated current. ............................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes,
lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the
proper authorities. .............................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .....
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ..............
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.
This may cause fire. ..........................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ..........
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ..............................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may
cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury..................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is
accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention
immediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain
medical attention. ..............................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. ........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ..............
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. .........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety

mechanisms and protective circuits. .................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related
brochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other
serious accident. ...............................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ...............................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If
it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ............................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ..............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause
electric shock if handled improperly. .................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are
safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections...........................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. .......
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ..........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ...................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ......................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ..............................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ...................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten
connector, trapped wire and missing screws. ..................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the
instruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ...................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ....................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the main
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet
immediately. ......................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than
the specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ................................................................................
2DA/2DB-1
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names and their functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1-3
(1) MFP ................................................................................................................................................ 1-1-3
(2) Operation panel .............................................................................................................................. 1-1-4
1-1-3 Machine cross section .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-5
1-1-4 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-6
1-2 Handling Precautions

1-2-1 Drum .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-2-2 Toner .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-2-3 Installation environment ....................................................................................................................... 1-2-2
1-3 Installation
1-3-1 Unpacking and installation ................................................................................................................... 1-3-1
(1) Installation procedure ..................................................................................................................... 1-3-1
1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes .................................................................................................................... 1-3-6
1-3-3 Installing the paper feeder (option) ...................................................................................................... 1-3-7
1-3-4 Installing the DP (option) ...................................................................................................................... 1-3-9
1-3-5 Installing the duplex unit (option) ....................................................................................................... 1-3-13
1-3-6 Installing the drawer heater (option) ................................................................................................... 1-3-16
1-3-7 Installing the key counter (option) ...................................................................................................... 1-3-19
1-3-8 Installing the finisher (option) ............................................................................................................. 1-3-22
1-3-9 Installing the job separator (option) .................................................................................................... 1-3-30
1-3-10 Installing the fax system (option) ........................................................................................................ 1-3-35
1-3-11 Installing the scan system (option) ..................................................................................................... 1-3-43
1-3-12 Installing the hard disk (option) .......................................................................................................... 1-3-45
1-4 Maintenance Mode

1-4-1 Maintenance mode ............................................................................................................................... 1-4-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ....................................................................................................... 1-4-1
(2) Maintenance modes item list .......................................................................................................... 1-4-2
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items ............................................................................................ 1-4-5
1-4-2 Management mode ............................................................................................................................ 1-4-54
(1) Using the management mode ...................................................................................................... 1-4-54
(2) Setting the job accounting ............................................................................................................ 1-4-55
(3) Copy default ................................................................................................................................. 1-4-56
(4) Machine default ............................................................................................................................ 1-4-58
(5) Bypass setting .............................................................................................................................. 1-4-60
(6) Checking the total counter and printing out the counter report ..................................................... 1-4-60
(7) Status report print out ................................................................................................................... 1-4-60
(8) Language selection function ......................................................................................................... 1-4-60
1-5 Troubleshooting
1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 1-5-1
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ................................................................................................ 1-5-2
(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................... 1-5-7
1-1-1
1-5-2 Self-diagnosis ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5-17
(1) Self-diagnostic function ................................................................................................................ 1-5-17
(2) Self-diagnostic codes ................................................................................................................... 1-5-18
1-5-3 Image formation problems ................................................................................................................. 1-5-26
(1) No image appears (entirely white). ............................................................................................... 1-5-27
(2) No image appears (entirely black). ............................................................................................... 1-5-27
(3) Image is too light. ......................................................................................................................... 1-5-28
2DA/2DB-1
(4) Background is visible. ................................................................................................................... 1-5-28

(5) A white line appears longitudinally. .............................................................................................. 1-5-28
(6) A black line appears longitudinally. .............................................................................................. 1-5-29
(7) A black line appears laterally. ....................................................................................................... 1-5-29
(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. ................................................................... 1-5-29
(9) Black dots appear on the image. .................................................................................................. 1-5-30
(10) Image is blurred. ........................................................................................................................... 1-5-30
(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................................ 1-5-30
(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ................................ 1-5-31
(13) Paper creases. ............................................................................................................................. 1-5-31
(14) Offset occurs. ............................................................................................................................... 1-5-31
(15) Image is partly missing. ................................................................................................................ 1-5-32
(16) Fixing is poor. ............................................................................................................................... 1-5-32
(17) Image is out of focus. ................................................................................................................... 1-5-32
(18) Image center does not align with the original center. ................................................................... 1-5-33
1-5-4 Electrical problems ............................................................................................................................. 1-5-34
(1) The machine does not operate when the power switch is turned on. ........................................... 1-5-34
(2) The drive motor does not operate (C2000). ................................................................................. 1-5-34
(3) The registration motor does not operate. ..................................................................................... 1-5-34
(4) The exit motor does not operate. .................................................................................................. 1-5-34
(5) The scanner motor does not operate. .......................................................................................... 1-5-35
(6) Cooling fan motor 1 does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-35
(9) The drawer drive motor* does not operate. .................................................................................. 1-5-35
(10) The paper feed clutch does not operate. ...................................................................................... 1-5-35
(11) The bypass paper feed clutch does not operate. ......................................................................... 1-5-35
(12) The drawer paper feed clutch* does not operate. ........................................................................ 1-5-36
(13) The cleaning lamp does not turn on. ............................................................................................ 1-5-36
(14) The exposure lamp does not turn on. ........................................................................................... 1-5-36
(15) The exposure lamp does not turn off. ........................................................................................... 1-5-36
(16) The fixing heater does not turn on (C6000). ................................................................................. 1-5-36
(17) The fixing heater does not turn off. ............................................................................................... 1-5-36
(18) Main charging is not performed. ................................................................................................... 1-5-36
(19) Transfer charging is not performed. ............................................................................................. 1-5-37
(20) No developing bias is output. ....................................................................................................... 1-5-37
(21) The original size is not detected. .................................................................................................. 1-5-37
(22) The original size is not detected correctly. ................................................................................... 1-5-37
(23) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in the drawer 1. .. 1-5-37
(24) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in the drawer 2*. 1-5-37
(25) The size of paper in the drawer 1 is not displayed correctly. ........................................................ 1-5-37
(26) The size of paper in the drawer 2* is not displayed correctly. ...................................................... 1-5-37
(27) A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying or fixing section is indicated when
the power switch is turned on. ...................................................................................................... 1-5-38
(28) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed when the front cover and
left cover are closed. .................................................................................................................... 1-5-38
(29) Others. .......................................................................................................................................... 1-5-38
1-5-5 Mechanical problems ......................................................................................................................... 1-5-39
(1) No primary paper feed. ................................................................................................................. 1-5-39
(2) No secondary paper feed. ............................................................................................................ 1-5-39
(3) Skewed paper feed. ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-39
(4) The scanner does not travel. ........................................................................................................ 1-5-39
1-1-2
(5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ................................................................................. 1-5-39
(6) Paper jams. .................................................................................................................................. 1-5-39
(7) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. ................................................................................... 1-5-40
(8) Abnormal noise is heard. .............................................................................................................. 1-5-40
2DA/2DB-1
1-6 Assembly and Disassembly

1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly ......................................................................................... 1-6-1
(1) Precautions ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-1
(2) Running a maintenance item .......................................................................................................... 1-6-2
1-6-2 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 1-6-3
(1) Detaching and refitting the separation pulley ................................................................................. 1-6-3
(2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley .............................................. 1-6-5
(3) Detaching and refitting the feed roller (20 ppm model only) ........................................................... 1-6-7
(4) Detaching and refitting the drawer separation pulley (20 ppm model only) .................................... 1-6-8
(5) Detaching and refitting the drawer forwarding pulley and drawer paper feed pulley
(20 ppm model only) ....................................................................................................................... 1-6-9
(6) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit ......................................................................... 1-6-11
(7) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper feed pulley and bypass separation pad ...................... 1-6-13
(8) Detaching and refitting the registration left roller .......................................................................... 1-6-15
(9) Detaching and refitting the registration cleaner ............................................................................ 1-6-15
(10) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement ............................................................................ 1-6-16
(10-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing .................................................... 1-6-16
(10-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing ..................................... 1-6-17
(10-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing ........................................................................... 1-6-18
(10-4) Adjusting the trailing edge margin of image printing ............................................................ 1-6-19
(10-5) Adjusting the margins for printing ........................................................................................ 1-6-20
(10-6) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper .......................................................................... 1-6-21
1-6-3 Optical section .................................................................................................................................... 1-6-22
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ................................................................................... 1-6-22
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires .................................................................................... 1-6-23
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires ............................................................................................... 1-6-23
(2-2) Fitting the scanner wires ...................................................................................................... 1-6-25
(3) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference) .................................................................................. 1-6-28
(4) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit .............................................................................. 1-6-29
(5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) ....................................................................... 1-6-32
(6) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction ........................................ 1-6-33
(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction ................................... 1-6-34
(8) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration ........................................................................... 1-6-35
(9) Adjusting the scanner center line ................................................................................................. 1-6-36
(10) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass ............................................ 1-6-37
1-6-4 Drum section ....................................................................................................................................... 1-6-38
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum unit ............................................................................................ 1-6-38
(2) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claws ....................................................................... 1-6-39
(3) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit ............................................................................... 1-6-40
1-6-5 Developing section .............................................................................................................................. 1-6-41
(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit .................................................................................. 1-6-41
1-6-6 Transfer section .................................................................................................................................. 1-6-42
(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller ..................................................................................... 1-6-42
1-6-7 Fixing section ...................................................................................................................................... 1-6-43
(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit ........................................................................................... 1-6-43
(2) Detaching and refitting the press roller ......................................................................................... 1-6-45
(3) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater M and S ......................................................................... 1-6-46
(4) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws ............................................................... 1-6-47
(5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller ........................................................................................... 1-6-48
(6) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermostat ................................................................................ 1-6-49
(7) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermistor ................................................................................. 1-6-49
(8) Adjusting the fixing unit height (adjusting lateral squareness) ...................................................... 1-6-50
1-1-3
1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement

1-7-1 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB ............................................................................................ 1-7-1
1-7-2 Upgrading the printer board firmware .................................................................................................. 1-7-2
1-7-3 Adjustment-free variable resisters (VR) ............................................................................................... 1-7-3
1-7-4 Remarks on engine PCB or main PCB replacement ........................................................................... 1-7-3
2DA/2DB-1
2-1 Mechanical construction

2-1-1 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 2-1-1
2-1-2 Optical section ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1-4
(1) Original scanning ............................................................................................................................ 2-1-5
(2) Image printing ................................................................................................................................. 2-1-6
2-1-3 Drum section ........................................................................................................................................ 2-1-8
2-1-4 Developing section ............................................................................................................................. 2-1-10
(1) Formation of magnetic brush ........................................................................................................ 2-1-11
(2) Single component developing system .......................................................................................... 2-1-12
2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections ....................................................................................................... 2-1-13
2-1-6 Fixing section ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1-15
(1) Fixing temperature system ........................................................................................................... 2-1-16
(2) Fixing temperature control based on ambient temperature .......................................................... 2-1-16
2-1-7 Exit and switchback sections ............................................................................................................. 2-1-17
2-1-8 Duplex section .................................................................................................................................... 2-1-18
(1) Paper conveying operation in duplex copying .............................................................................. 2-1-19
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ........................................................................................................................... 2-2-1
(1) PCBs .............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-1
(2) Switches and sensors ..................................................................................................................... 2-2-2
(3) Motors ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-4
(4) Other electrical components ........................................................................................................... 2-2-5
2-3 Operation of the PCBs

2-3-1 Power source PCB ............................................................................................................................... 2-3-1
2-3-2 Main PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 2-3-4
2-3-3 Engine PCB .......................................................................................................................................... 2-3-8
2-3-4 Printer board PCB .............................................................................................................................. 2-3-14
2-3-5 Operation unit PCB ............................................................................................................................ 2-3-18
2-3-6 CCD PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 2-3-21
2-4 Appendixes
Timing chart No. 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-1
Timing chart No. 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-2
Timing chart No. 3 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-3
Timing chart No. 4 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-4
Chart of image adjustment procedures .......................................................................................................... 2-4-5
Maintenance parts list .................................................................................................................................... 2-4-8
Periodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................................................. 2-4-9
General wiring diagram ................................................................................................................................ 2-4-11
1-1-4
2DA/2DB
1-1-1 Specifications
Type ............................................... Desktop

Copying system .............................. Indirect electrostatic system
Originals ......................................... Sheets, books and 3-dimensional objects (Maximum original size: A3/11" × 17")
Original feed system ...................... Fixed
Copy paper ..................................... Paper weights
Drawer: 60 – 105 g/m2
Bypass table: 45 – 160 g/m2
Paper type
Drawer: Plain paper, recycled paper and colored paper
Bypass table: Plain paper, recycled paper, thin paper, thick paper and colored paper
Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: A3/11" × 17"
Minimum: A6R /51/2" × 81/2"
Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 25 – 200%, 1% increments
Copy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in copy mode:
16 ppm model 20 ppm model
A4: 16 copies/min. A4: 20 copies/min.
A4R: 13 copies/min. A4R: 13 copies/min.
A3: 8 copies/min. A3: 10 copies/min.
B5: 16 copies/min. B5: 20 copies/min.
B5R: 13 copies/min. B5R: 13 copies/min.
B4 (257 × 364 mm): 8 copies/min. B4 (257 × 364 mm): 11 copies/min.
11" × 81/2": 16 copies/min. 11" × 81/2": 20 copies/min.
1
8 /2" × 11": 13 copies/min. 81/2" × 11": 13 copies/min.
11" × 17": 8 copies/min. 11" × 17": 10 copies/min.
81/2" × 14": 8 copies/min. 81/2" × 14": 11 copies/min.
First copy time ................................ 5.9 s or less (A4/11" × 81/2")
Warm-up time ................................. Less then 20 s (room temperature 23°C/73.4°F, 50% RH)
Time for recovery from low power mode: 10 s
Time for recovery from sleep mode: 20 s
Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feed
Capacity:
Drawers: 300 sheets (80 g/m2)
100 sheets (90 – 105 g/m2)
Manual feed
Capacity:
Bypass: 50 sheets (A4/11" × 81/2" or less)
25 sheets (A3, B4, 11" × 17", 81/2" × 14")
Paper ejection system .................... In-machine ejection (face down)
Capacity: 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Continuous copying ........................ 1 – 999 sheets
Photoconductor .............................. OPC (drum diameter 30 mm)
Charging system ............................ Single positive corona charging
Recording system .......................... Semiconductor laser
Developing system ......................... Single component developing system
Toner: magnetism toner
Toner replenishing: automatic from a toner container
Transfer system ............................. Transfer roller
Separation system ......................... Curvature separation and separation electrode
Fixing system ................................. Heat roller
Heat source: halogen heaters (120 V specifications:main 550 W, sub 400W/ 220-240
V specifications: main 590 W, sub 430 W)
Control temperature: 170°C/338°F (180°C/356°F on and after 6th sheet)
Abnormally high temperature protection device: 180°C/356°F thermostat
Fixing pressure: 44.1 N
Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lamp
Cleaning system ............................. Cleaning blade
Scanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor
Bitmap memory .............................. 35 MB (standard)
Image storage memory .................. 29 MB (standard)
1-1-1
2DA/2DB-1
Additional memory ......................... 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB and 128 MB

Resolution ...................................... 600 × 600 dpi
Light source .................................... Inert gas lamp
Dimensions .................................... 16 ppm model: 574 (W) × 593 (D) × 545 (H) mm
225/8" (W) × 233/8" (D) × 217/16" (H)
20 ppm model: 574 (W) × 593 (D) × 650 (H) mm
225/8" (W) × 233/8" (D) × 259/16" (H)
Weight ............................................ 16 ppm model: Approx. 42 kg/92.4 lbs
20 ppm model: Approx. 49 kg/107.8 lbs
Floor requirements ......................... 827 (W) × 593 (D) mm
325/8" (W) × 233/8" (D)
Functions ........................................ Automatic paper selection, Image quality selection, Automatic sizing selection
function, zoom function, Duplex copy, Divided copy, Binding margin, Border width,
Aggregate copy, Sort copy, Eco-copy, Copy program and Section management mode
Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 9.0 A
220 – 240 V AC, 50 Hz, 5.0 A
Options ........................................... Document processer, paper feeder, duplex unit, finisher, job separator, key counter,
fax system, network scanner, hard disk and additional memory
• Printer functions
Printing speed ................................ Same as copying speed
First print time ................................ Approx. 5.5 s (A4/11" × 81/2")
Resolution ...................................... 300 dpi, 600 dpi, Fast 1200 mode
Memory .......................................... 64 MB (standard)
Additional memory: 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB and 256 MB
Hard disk: 340 MB, 512 MB and 1 GB
Applicable OS ................................ Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.x/2000/XP
Apple Macintosh OS 9.x/OS X 10.x
UNIX/Linux
Interface ......................................... Parallel interface (based on IEEE1284)
Network interface
USB 2.0 (USB Hi-Speed)
Network interface card (option)
• Duplex unit
Type ............................................... Internal type
Copy paper ..................................... Paper weights: 64 – 90 g/m2
Paper type: Plain paper, recycled paper and colored paper
Paper sizes .................................... A3 – A5R/11" × 17" – 51/2" × 81/2"
Power source ................................. Electrically connected to the MFP
Dimensions .................................... 368 (W) × 53 (D) × 180 (H) mm
141/2" (W) × 21/16" (D) × 71/16" (H)
Weight ............................................ Approx. 0.65 kg/1.43 lbs
1-1-2
2DA/2DB
1-1-2 Parts names and their functions
(1) MFP
Figure 1-1-1
1 Original cover 0 Support guide ( Front cover

2 Copy storage section ! Slider ) Power switch
3 Operation panel @ Contact glass ⁄ Power switch cover
4 Drawer 1 # Original size indicator plates ¤ Handles for transport
5 Drawer 2 (20 ppm model only) $ Left cover ‹ Network interface connector
6 Width guide % Waste toner box › USB interface connector
7 Length guide ^ Toner container release lever fi Parallel interface connector
8 Left cover handle & Toner container fl Memory card slot
9 Bypass tray * Cleaner rod
1-1-3
2DA/2DB
(2) Operation panel
Figure 1-1-2
1 System Menu/Counter key and indicator ) Paper Select key / Right cursor key
2 Copier key and indicator ⁄ Enter key
3 Printer key and indicator ¤ Image quality mode select key
4 Scanner key and indicator ‹ Auto Exposure key
5 Fax key and indicator › Lighter key / Darker key / exposure display
6 Combine key and indicator fi Message display
7 Border Erase key and indicator fl Ready indicator
8 Duplex/Split Page key and indicator ‡ Data indicator
9 Offset key and indicator — Attention indicator
0 Function key · Job Accounting key
! Scanner Function key ‚ Interrupt key and indicator
@ Auto Selection key and indicator Œ Energy Saver key and indicator
# Margin key and indicator „ Power key and indicator
$ Sort key and indicator ´ Numeric keys
% Staple key and indicator ‰ Reset key
^ Program key ˇ Stop/Clear key
& Zoom key / Left cursor key Á Start key and indicator
* Auto%/100% key / Down cursor key ¨ Main power indicator
( Original Size key / Up cursor key
1-1-4
2DA/2DB
1-1-3 Machine cross section
Light path
Paper path
Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section
1 Paper feed section

2 Optical section
3 Drum section
4 Developing section
5 Transfer and separation section
6 Fixing section
7 Exit and switchback section
8 Duplex section
1-1-5
2DA/2DB
1-1-4 Drive system
Figure 1-1-4
1 Drive motor gear % Developing gear 25

2 Gear 122 ^ Developing gear 26
3 Registration gear 51 & Fixing joint gear 29
4 Registration motor gear * Gear 40
5 Gear 32 ( Gear 40
6 Gear 25 ) Gear 88/34
7 Gear 25 ⁄ Gear 40
8 Gear 20 ¤ Fixing joint gear 40
9 Paper feed clutch gear ‹ Coupling gear
0 Gear 30 › Gear 50
! Gear 31 fi Gear 60
@ Gear 25 fl Exit motor gear
# Gear 49 ‡ Gear 43/20
$ Gear 30/23
1-1-6
2DA/2DB
1-2-1 Drum
Note the following when handling or storing the drum.
• When removing the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
• Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between –20°C/–4°F and 55°C/131°F and at a relative humidity not higher
than 90% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.
• Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.
• Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
1-2-2 Toner
Store the toner in a cool, dark place. Avoid direct light and high humidity.
1-2-1
2DA/2DB-1
1-2-3 Installation environment
1. Temperature: 10 - 32.5°C/50 - 90.5°F

2. Humidity: 15 - 80%RH
3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 9.0 A
220 - 240 V AC, 5.0 A
4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz ±0.3%/60 Hz ±0.3%
5. Installation location
• Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other
strong light when removing paper jams.
• Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto
the machine.
• Avoid dust and vibration.
• Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
• Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1° ).
• Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as
mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
• Select a room with good ventilation.
6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.
Machine front: 1000 mm/393/8" Machine rear: 100 mm/315/16"
Machine right: 300 mm/1113/16" Machine left: 300 mm/1113/16"
c g
a: 571 mm/221/2"
b: 593 mm/233/8"
c: 500 mm/1911/16"
d: 1371.5 mm/54"
e: 1323 mm/521/16"
f: 952.5 mm/371/2"
g: 605 mm/2313/16"
Figure 1-2-1 Installation dimensions
1-2-2
2DA/2DB
1-3-1 Unpacking and installation
(1) Installation procedure
Start
Unpack.
Install the optional paper feeder.
Installing the toner

(maintenance item U130).
Remove the tapes and pins.
Load paper.
Install the original cover or the optional DP.
Output an own-status report

Install the optional duplex unit. (maintenance item U000).
Install the optional finisher or job separator. Exit maintenance mode.
Install the toner container. Make test copies.
Connect the power cord. End of installation.
1-3-1
2DA/2DB
Unpack.
16 ppm model
Figure 1-3-1a Unpacking
1 MFP 0 Left spacer ( Original holder

2 Power cord ! Rear spacer (Asia and Oceania)
3 Toner container @ Rear pad ) Operation guide
4 Outer case # Skid Cassette size sheet
5 Lower left pad $ Belt Paper protection bag
6 Lower right pad % Eject sheet Error code label
7 Upper left pad ^ Machine cover Inspection report
8 Upper right pad & Bar code labels
9 Inner frame * Top sheet
* Place the machine on a level surface.
1-3-2
2DA/2DB
20 ppm model
Figure 1-3-1b Unpacking
1 MFP 0 Left spacer ( Original holder

2 Power cord ! Rear spacer (Asia and Oceania)
3 Toner container @ Rear pad ) Front pad
4 Outer case # Skid ⁄ Operation guide
5 Lower left pad $ Belt Cassette size sheet
6 Lower right pad % Eject sheet Paper protection bag
7 Upper left pad ^ Machine cover Error code label
8 Upper right pad & Bar code labels Inspection report
9 Inner frame * Top sheet
* Place the machine on a level surface.
1-3-3
2DA/2DB
Install the optional paper feeder.

1. Install the optional paper feeder as necessary
(see page 1-3-7 to 1-3-8).
Remove the tapes and pins.

1. Remove the ten tapes (16 ppm model).
Remove the fifteen tapes (20 ppm model).
16 ppm model Tape
Tapes
Tape
Tapes
Tape
Tapes
20 ppm model Tape
Tapes
Tapes
Tape
Tapes
Tapes
Tapes
Figure 1-3-2
2. Remove the two pins for light source unit. Pins
Figure 1-3-3
1-3-4
2DA/2DB-1
Install the original cover or optional DP.

1. Install the original cover or optional DP (see pages 1-3-9 to 1-3-12 when installing the DP).
Install the optional duplex unit.

1. Install the optional duplex unit as necessary (see pages 1-3-13 to 1-3-15).
Install the optional finisher or job separator.

1. Install the optional finisher or job separator as necessary (see pages 1-3-22 to 1-3-34).
Install the toner container.

1. Open the front cover.
Toner container release lever
2. Tap the top of the toner container five to six
times.
3. Shake the toner container approximately 10 times
in the horizontal direction to stir toner.
4. Turn the toner container release lever and gently
push the toner container into the MFP.
* Push the container all the way into the MFP until
it locks in place.
5. Restore the toner container release lever.
6. Close the front cover.
Toner container
Figure 1-3-4
Connect the power cord.

1. Connect the power cord to the connector on the MFP.
2. Insert the power plug into the wall outlet and turn the power switch on.
Installing the toner (maintenance item U130).

1. Enter the maintenance mode by entering “10871087” using the numeric keys.
2. Enter “130” using the numeric keys and press the start key.
3. Select the “EXECUTE” using the up/down cursor keys.
4. Press the start key to execute the maintenance item.
Installation of toner starts and time (minutes) is indicated until the installation ends.
5. When the installation is complete, “FINISHED” will be displayed if the installation is successful or “NG” will be
displayed if it has failed.
If “NG” is displayed, check to see if the toner container contains toner and to see if the toner container sensor
malfunctions and then try again.
6. Press the stop/clear key.
Load paper.
1. Load paper in the drawer.
1-3-5
2DA/2DB
Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000).

1. Enter “000” using the numeric keys and press the
start key.
2. Select “MAINTENANCE” and press the start key
to output a list of the current settings of the
maintenance items.
3. Press the stop/clear key.
Exit maintenance mode.

1. Enter “001” using the numeric keys and press the
start key.
The machine exits the maintenance mode.
Make test copies.

1. Place an original and make test copies.
End of installation.
1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes
Factory settings are as follows:
Maintenance Contents Factory setting

item No.
U253 Switching between double and single counts Double count

U254 Turning auto start function on/off ON
U258 Switching copy operation at toner SINGLE MODE
empty detection
U260 Changing the copy count timing After ejection
U264 Setting the display order of the date Month/Day/Year (Inch specifications)
Day/Month/Year (Inch specifications)
U277 Setting auto aplication change time 30
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication ON
U342 Setting the ejection restriction ON
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode OFF
U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode ENERGY STAR
1-3-6
2DA/2DB-1
1-3-3 Installing the paper feeder (option)

<Procedure>
1. Place the MFP on the paper feeder by aligning the
positioning insertion sections of the MFP with the
positioning pins at the rear part of the paper feeder.
* When placing the MFP, take care not to hit the
MFP against the drawer, the pins or ground plate of
the paper feeder.
Positioning pins
Paper feeder
Figure 1-3-5
For stacking paper feeders for use:
Stack a paper feeder on another paper feeder by
aligning the positioning insertion sections of the first
paper feeder with the positioning pins at the rear Positioning
part of the second paper feeder. pins
(For 16 ppm model, three paper feeders can be added.
For 20 ppm model, two paper feeders can be added.)
Positioning
pins
Figure 1-3-6
2. If a type of paper that is not included in the

specifications for the standard sheet cassette size is
used, replace the cassette size sheet indication with
the supplied one.
3. Insert the MFP power plug into the wall outlet and
turn the power switch on.
Load paper in the drawer and make test copies to
check the operation.
Cassette size
sheet indication
Figure 1-3-7
1-3-7
2DA/2DB-1
Adjusting the leading edge timing

1. Run maintenance mode 034.
Select ADJ, RCL ON TIMING and press the start key.
First optional cassette: Select RCL T1.
Second optional cassette: Select RCL T2.
Third optional cassette: Select RCL T3.
For models equipped with two standard cassettes, adjust only RCL T2 and RCL T3.
Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern and check the image. If an adequate image cannot be obtained,
carry out the following adjustment.
2. If a test pattern a is obtained, increase the adjustment value.
If a test pattern b is obtained, decrease the adjustment value.
Setting range: -5.0 - +10.0
Changing the value by one moves the leading edge by 0.1 mm.
3. Output the test pattern again.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an adequate image is obtained.
Adequate image Test pattern a Test pattern b
Figure 1-3-8-1
Adjusting the center line

Select ADJ, LSU OUT TIMING and press the start key.
First optional cassette: Select LSU T1.
Second optional cassette: Select LSU T2.
Third optional cassette: Select LSU T3.
For models equipped with two standard cassettes, adjust only LSU T2 and LSU T3.
Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern and check the image. If an adequate image cannot be obtained,
carry out the following adjustment.
2. If a test pattern a is obtained, increase the adjustment value.
If a test pattern b is obtained, decrease the adjustment value.
Setting range: -7.0 - +10.0
Changing the value by one moves the center line by 0.1 mm.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an adequate image is obtained.
Adequate image Test pattern a Test pattern b
Figure 1-3-8-2
1-3-8
2DA/2DB-1
• Installing the drawer heater (option)
Drawer heater installation requires the following parts:

• Drawer heater (P/N 120 V specifications: 2A727480, 220-240 V specifications: 2A727490)
• Ground plate (P/N 3BG02060)
• Drawer heater mounting plate (P/N 3HW02030)
• One (1) M3 × 6 tap-tight S binding screw (P/N B3023060)
<Procedure>
M3 × 6 taptite
1. Remove the rear cover of the paper feeder. S binding screw
2. Pull out the drawer.
3. Fit the drawer heater to the hook on the Drawer heater
drawer heater mounting plate. Ground plate
Mount the heater so that the projection of the
drawer heater mounting plate is inserted into Drawer heater
the hole of the drawer heater. mounting plate
* After mounting, check that the projection is
securely inserted into the hole and that the
drawer heater does not move forward/
backward or right/left.
4. Fit the ground plate to the drawer heater
mounting plate using the M3 × 6 taptite S Projection
binding screw.
Hook Hook
Figure 1-3-9-1
5. Insert the drawer heater mounting plate from Fitting portion Fitting portion Hole
the front side of the machine, pass the drawer
heater wire through the hole on the frame at
the rear side of the machine, and pull the wire
out from the rear side of the machine.
6. Fit the two holes at the rear of the drawer
heater mounting plate to the fitting portions at
the rear side of the machine.
Drawer heater
mounting plate
Drawer heater wire
Figure 1-3-9-2
1-3-8-1
1-3-9
2DA/2DB-1
7. Fit the three holes on the front of the drawer

heater mounting plate to the positioning
portion and the fitting portions on the front Positioning portion Fitting portion
Fitting portion
side of the machine.
Drawer heater mounting plate
Figure 1-3-9-3
8. Connect the connector of the drawer heater

wire to YC3 on the drawer heater PCB. YC3
Put the drawer heater wire inside the paper Drawer heater PCB
feeder cover by bending.
9. Refit all the removed parts.
Drawer heater wire
Figure 1-3-9-4
1-3-10
1-3-8-2
2DA/2DB
1-3-4 Installing the DP (option)

<Procedure>
1. Remove the original holder and remove the two Pin
screws from the rear top cover.
2. Pass the two pins through the screw holes of the rear Screw
Pin
top cover and attach them to the lower frame.
Screw
Figure 1-3-10
3. Place the DP on the MFP by fitting the pins into the DP

holes at the hinge sections of the DP and sliding Pin Pin
them toward the front side.
Hole Hole
Figure 1-3-11
4. Secure the DP with the two TP Taptite chromate TP Taptite TP Taptite

screws M4 × 10 and the two screws that have been chromate chromate
removed in step 1. screw M4 × 10 Screw screw M4 × 10
Screw
DP
Figure 1-3-12
1-3-9
2DA/2DB
5. Close the DP, fit the fixing fitting from the rear side of
the right hinge, and secure it with the two bronze TP
screws M3 x 06.
6. Connect the cable of the DP to the MFP.
* Be sure to tighten the fixing screws on both side of
the connector.
Cable
Fixing fitting
Bronze TP screws M3 x 06
Figure 1-3-13
7. Clean the pasting position for the caution label with

alcohol.
Paste the caution label that corresponds to the
language according to the destination to the DP.
Caution label
Figure 1-3-14
[Operation check] 15mm 15mm

1. Prepare an original on which 4 lines are drawn 15
mm from the edges and the center line is drawn. 15mm
Center line
2. Set the original on the DP and make a test copy to
check the copy image.
At this time, set the paper guide for the original table Lines
and drawer to the paper size to be used.
3. If the copy image does not match the original image,
carry out the following adjustments in maintenance Lines
mode.
• Maintenance mode 070 (sub-scan line adjustment)
• Maintenance mode 071 (leading edge timing
adjustment) 15mm
• Maintenance mode 072 (center line adjustment)
Original
Figure 1-3-15
1-3-10
2DA/2DB
Maintenance mode 070 (sub-scan line adjustment)

Select CONVEY SPEED1.
(For adjustment of the back side in duplex copying, select CONVEY SPEED2.)
Set originals in the original tray and press the interrupt key. Make a test copy to check the image.
If an adequate image cannot be obtained, carry out the following adjustment.
2. For copy example a: decrease the value.
For copy example b: increase the value.
Setting range: -25 - +25
Changing the value by one changes the sub-scan line by 0.1%.
A smaller setting value makes the copy image shorter. A larger value makes the image longer.
Original Copy example a Copy example b
Figure 1-3-16
Maintenance mode 071 (leading edge timing adjustment)

Select LEAD1.
(For adjustment of the back side in duplex copying, select LEAD2.)
Set originals in the original tray and press the interrupt key. Make a test copy to check the image.
2. For copy example a: increase the value.
For copy example b: decrease the value.
Changing the value by one moves the leading edge by 0.2 mm.
The larger the value, the later the image scan start timing.
The smaller the value, the earlier the image scan start timing.
Figure 1-3-17
1-3-11
2DA/2DB
Maintenance mode 072 (center line adjustment)

Select 1sided.
(For adjustment of the front side in duplex copying, select 2sided front. For adjustment of the back side, select 2sided
back.)
Set originals in the original tray and press the Interrupt key. Make a test copy to check the image.
2. For copy example a: increase the value.
For copy example b: decrease the value.
Changing the value by one moves the center line by 0.1 mm.
The larger the value, the center of the image moves toward the right.
The smaller the value, the center of the image moves toward the left.
Figure 1-3-18
1-3-12
2DA/2DB
1-3-5 Installing the duplex unit (option)

<Procedure>
1. Open the left cover.
2. Remove the stop ring and the strap from the rear
side.
3. Restore the conveyor section.
4. Remove the fitting projection and pin, and then Fitting projection
remove the stopper from the front side.
5. Open the left cover until it is put horizontally.
Stopper
Stop
ring
Strap Pin
Left cover
Figure 1-3-19
6. Turn the wire guide section of the duplex unit in the

direction indicated by the arrow.
Wire guide section
Figure 1-3-20
7. Insert the axis sections of the duplex unit into the U-

shape grooves of the conveyer unit.
Axis section Axis section
Duplex unit
Figure 1-3-21
1-3-13
2DA/2DB-1
8. Press the duplex unit in the direction indicated by the

arrow to fit the claws into the conveyer unit.
Duplex unit
Claws
Claw
Figure 1-3-22-1
9. Hang the hook of the plate lock on the conveying unit

and then turn the plate lock to fit the hole to the claw
of the duplex unit.
Hook
Plate lock
Hole
Claw
Figure 1-3-22-2
Duplex unit
10. Secure the duplex unit with the two S tite screws M3
× 06.
S tite screws
M3 × 06
Figure 1-3-23
1-3-14
2DA/2DB-1
11. Open the conveyer unit and connect the connector of

the duplex unit to the MFP.
12. Reattach the removed parts to their original
positions.
13. Connect the MFP power plug to the wall outlet and
Duplex unit
Connector
Figure 1-3-24
Adjusting the leading edge timing

Select ADJ, RCL ON TIMING and press the start
key.
Select RCL DUP.
Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern in
the duplex mode and check the image.
If an adequate image cannot be obtained, carry out
the following adjustment.
2. If a test pattern a is obtained, increase the
adjustment value.
If a test pattern b is obtained, decrease the
adjustment value.
Setting range: -5.0 - +10.0 Adequate image Test pattern a Test pattern b
Changing the value by one moves the leading edge
by 0.1 mm.
3. Output the test pattern again. Figure 1-3-25
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an adequate image is
obtained.
Adjusting the center line

Select ADJ, LSU OUT TIMING and press the start
key.
Select LSU DUP.
Press the Interrupt key to output the test pattern in
the duplex mode and check the image.
If an adequate image cannot be obtained, carry out
the following adjustment.
2. a: Adequate image
2. If a test pattern a is obtained, increase the
adjustment value.
If a test pattern b is obtained, decrease the
adjustment value.
Setting range: -7.0 - +10.0 Adequate image Test pattern a Test pattern b
Changing the value by one moves the center line by
0.1 mm. Figure 1-3-26
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until an adequate image is
obtained.
1-3-15
2DA/2DB-1
1-3-6 Installing the drawer heater (option)
Drawer heater installation requires the following parts:

• Drawer heater (P/N 120 V specifications: 2C960030, 220-240 V specifications: 2C960040)
• One (1) M4 × 10 tap-tight S binding screw (P/N B3024100)
<Procedure>
1. Remove the main body from the paper feeder (see
page 1-6-7).
2. Remove the right cover. Pull out the drawer.
3. Remove the three screws and then the front right
cover.
Front right cover
Figure 1-3-27
1-3-16
2DA/2DB
4. Insert the cassette heater from the bottom of the

machine and attach it to the MFP.
1) Pass the connector of the cassette heater through Holes in the rear frame
the hole located in the right frame of the machine to
pull it out.
2) Insert the projections at the rear side of the cassette
heater mounting plate into the two holes in the rear
frame of the machine.
3) Position the screw hole of the drawer heater to the
screw hole of the front frame of the machine and
secure the heater using the M4 × 10 Taptite S
binding screw.
Projections
Drawer heater
Hole in the right frame
Screw hole
Connector
M4 × 10 tap tight
S binding screw
Figure 1-3-28
1-3-17
2DA/2DB
5. Remove the two screws and open the power source

PCB in the direction indicated by the arrow. Wire of the drawer heater
* Take care not to open the power source PCB too
much.
6. Fit the wire of the drawer heater into the groove of
the frame and put it inside the power source PCB.
* Fit the wire into the groove so that the band mounted
to the wire is located above the frame.
Power source PCB
Band
Figure 1-3-29
7. Reattach the power source PCB to its original Connector

position and connect the connector of the drawer
heater to YC8 of the power source PCB.
YC8
Figure 1-3-30
1-3-18
2DA/2DB
1-3-7 Installing the key counter (option)
Key counter installation requires the following parts:

• Key counter cover (P/N 2A360010)
• Key counter retainer (P/N 66060030)
• Key counter mount (P/N 66060040)
• Key counter assembly (P/N 41529210)
• Four (4) M4 × 6 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304060)
• One (1) M4 × 35 round head screw (P/N B0004350)
• Two (2) M3 × 6 bronze flat-head screws (P/N B2303060)
• One (1) M3 bronze nut (P/N C2303000)
• Key counter mounting plate (P/N 2C960100)
• Key counter wire (P/N 2C960110)
Procedure
1. Fit the key counter socket assembly to the key
counter retainer using the two screws and nut.
2. Fit the key counter mount to the key counter cover
using the two screws, and attach the key counter
retainer to the mount using the two screws.
M4 × 6 screws (B4304060)
Key counter retainer (66060030)
Key counter mount (66060040)

M3 nut
(C2303000) Key counter cover
(2A360010)
M4 × 6 screws (B4304060)
Key counter socket assembly

(41529210)
M3 × 6 flat-head screws (B2303060)
Figure 1-3-31
1-3-19
2DA/2DB
3. Remove the rear cover.

4. Cut out the aperture plate on the right cover using
nippers.
5. Connect the 4-pin connector of the key counter wire
(located at a longer distance from the tube) to YC13
on the engine PCB, pass the wire through the two
clamps, and pull the other 4-pin connector out from
the aperture of the right cover.
* Arrange the key counter wire behind the optical Aperture
4-pin connector
system wire as shown in the illustration.
7-pin connector
6. Fold the 7-pin connector of the key counter wire
back, pass the wire through the clamp at the upper
part of the controller box, and hang it. Clamp
YC13
Key counter wire
Clamp 4-pin connector
Figure 1-3-32
7. Pass the connector of the key counter through the

aperture of the key counter mounting plate, and
Key counter mounting
engage the projection of key counter mounting plate 4-pin connector
plate (2C960100)
with the square hole of the key counter cover.
Aperture Key counter

cover
Projection
Square hole
Figure 1-3-33
1-3-20
2DA/2DB
8. Connect the 4-pin connector of the key counter to the

key counter wire.
9. Engage the projection of the key counter mounting
plate with the aperture of the right cover.
10. Secure the key counter cover and the key counter
mounting plate together with the MFP using a M4 x
35 screw. Aperture
11. Refit the rear cover.
Key counter wire
4-pin connector
Projection
Key counter
cover
M4×35 screw
(B0004350)
Key counter mounting
plate (2C960100)
Figure 1-3-34
12. Insert the key counter into the key counter socket
assembly.
13. Turn the power switch on and enter the maintenance
mode.
14. Run maintenance item U204 and select “KEY-
COUNTER.”
15. Exit the maintenance mode.
16. Check that the message requesting the key counter
to be inserted is displayed on the message display
when the key counter is pulled out.
17. Check that the counter counts up as copies are
made.
1-3-21
2DA/2DB
1-3-8 Installing the finisher (option)

<Note>
When placing the transfer unit on the floor or the like, be
sure to place it upside down. If not, the staple mounting
plate may be deformed, resulting in a malfunction. Transfer unit
Figure 1-3-35
Be sure to remove the tape for the intermediate tray at

Intermediate tray
Procedure 16 not removing before mounting.
Figure 1-3-36
<Procedure>
Remove the covers.
1. Remove the two screws to remove the upper left
Upper left cover
cover.
Screws
Figure 1-3-37
1-3-22
2DA/2DB

3. Remove the inner cover.
Inner cover
Figure 1-3-38
4. Release the fitting parts using a small screw driver or

the like and remove the front side cover.
Fitting parts
Front side cover

Figure 1-3-39
5. Remove the screw and the fitting part located on the

right side and then remove the left front cover.
Left front
cover
Screw
Fitting part
Figure 1-3-40
1-3-23
2DA/2DB
7. Remove the three screws and then remove the

ejection cover and inner ejection cover. Inner ejection cover
Ejection cover
Screw Screws
Figure 1-3-41
8. Remove the two screws and then remove the cover.
Screws
Cover
Figure 1-3-42
1-3-24
2DA/2DB
Attach the transfer unit.

9. Insert the transfer unit from the MFP front side and
slide it to the left to install to the ejection part.
10. Place the transfer unit closer to the ejection side and
then secure the front side using the TP bind screw
M3 × 06 and the rear side using the pin.
Pin
Transfer unit
TP bind screw
M3 × 06
Figure 1-3-43
Release the lever securing fitting.

11. Loosen the screw located at the rear side of the
transfer unit and release the lever securing fitting in
the direction of an arrow, and then retighten the
screw.
Lever
securing fitting
Screw
Figure 1-3-44
1-3-25
2DA/2DB
Attach the intermediate tray.

12. Loosen the screw located inside of the MFP by about
3 turns.
* Do not turn the screw too much, otherwise it may
drop in the machine.
13. Hang the hook of the hook holder onto the screw and
then retighten the screw.
3
Screw
Screw
Hook holder Screw
Hook holder
Figure 1-3-45
14. Insert the intermediate tray from the front side of the
MFP while pushing the hook to the back and then
push the pin located at the right rear side of the
intermediate tray into the hook holder until the fitting
sound is heard.
Intermediate
tray
Pin
Hook
holder
Hook
Figure 1-3-46
1-3-26
2DA/2DB
15. Fit the pin located at the left rear side of the 24-pin connector
13-pin connector Pin
intermediate tray from the rear side of the MFP onto
the hook of the transfer unit.
16. Remove the tape and pull out the 13-pin connector
and 24-pin connector.
Hook
Tape
Figure 1-3-47
17. Connect the 24-pin connector of the intermediate tray YC5

to the connector of the transfer unit.
18. Connect the 13-pin connector of the intermediate tray
to YC5 on the engine circuit board.
13-pin connector 24-pin connector Connector
Figure 1-3-48
Attach the covers.
Large ejection cover
19. Attach the cover that has been removed by
Procedure 8 to its original position using the two
screws.
20. Attach the large ejection cover with the two screws
that have been removed by Procedure 1.
Screws
Figure 1-3-49
1-3-27
2DA/2DB
21. Attach the front ejection cover and rear ejection

cover using the TP bind screw M3 × 06 each. Rear ejection cover
Front ejection cover
TP bind screw
M3 × 06
TP bind screw
M3 × 06
Figure 1-3-50

23. Attach the staple cover as it is fitted to the staple unit
from the ejection side and then secure it using the TP
bind screw M3 × 06.
24. Attach the inner cover that has been removed by
Procedure 3 to its original position.
TP bind screw M3 × 06
Staple cover
Figure 1-3-51
1-3-28
2DA/2DB
26. Insert the front and rear hooks of the copy tray into
the front ejection cover and rear ejection cover each
and then attach the copy tray.
Rear ejection
cover
Copy tray
Front ejection cover
Figure 1-3-52
27. Open the staple cover and then insert the staple
cartridge into the staple unit.
28. Close the staple cover.
Staple cover
Staple cartridge
Figure 1-3-53
Operation check
1. Insert the MFP power plug into an outlet and then
2. Select the staple mode and check the staple
operation.
1-3-29
2DA/2DB
1-3-9 Installing the job separator (option)
<Procedure>
Remove the covers.
Inner cover
Figure 1-3-54
3. Release the fitting parts using a small screw driver or

the like and remove the front side cover.
Fitting parts
Front side cover
Figure 1-3-55
4. Remove the screw and the fitting part located on the

right side and then remove the left front cover.
Left front
cover
Screw
Fitting part
Figure 1-3-56
1-3-30
2DA/2DB
5. Remove the three screws and then remove the

ejection cover and inner ejection cover. Inner ejection cover
Ejection cover
Screw Screws
Figure 1-3-57
6. Remove the two screws and then remove the cover.
Screws
Cover
Figure 1-3-58
1-3-31
2DA/2DB-1
Attach the job separator.

7. Insert the job separator from the MFP front side and
slide it to the left to install to the ejection part.
8. Place the job separator closer to the ejection side
and then secure the front side (left tapped hole) with
the large pin and the rear side with the small pin.
Small pin
Job separator
Large pin
Figure 1-3-59
9. Loosen the screw that secures the drive unit located

at the rear side of the job separator to make it ready
for starting to drive and then retighten the screw.
10. Connect the connector of the job separator to YC5
on the engine circuit board.
11. Attach the cover that has been removed by
Procedure 6 to its original position using the two
screws.
YC5
Drive unit
Connector Screw
Figure 1-3-60
1-3-32
2DA/2DB
Attach the copy tray.

12. Insert the left part of the copy tray into the groove of
the job separator. Fit the right hook into the hole
located inside of MFP while pushing the copy tray to
the back along the groove.
Hole
Groove
Copy tray
Right hook
Figure 1-3-61
Attach the left front cover JS.

13. Pull out the connector of the job separator from the
hole of the left front cover that has been removed by
Procedure 4 and then attach the left front cover to its
original position using the screw.
Left front
cover
Connector Screw
Figure 1-3-62
1-3-33
2DA/2DB
14. Connect the pulled out connector of the job separator

to the LED PCB of the left front cover JS and then LED PCB
pass the wire through the two positions of the groove Connector
of the left front cover JS.
Left front cover JS
Grooves
Figure 1-3-63
15. Fit the pawl of the left front cover JS into the hole of
the left front cover to attach the left front cover JS.
* In this time, take care that the routed wire in the
groove does not come off.
16. Attach the inner cover that has been removed by
Procedure 2 to its original position.
Holes
Left front cover JS
Figure 1-3-64
Operation check
1. Insert the power plug of the MFP into an outlet and
then turn the power switch on.
2. Set the “copy ejection location” of the machine
default settings to job separator.
3. Make a test copy to check that a copy is ejected to
the job separator tray.
1-3-34
2DA/2DB
1-3-10 Installing the fax system (option)
<Procedure>
Install the optional Memory module DIMM (32MB).
1.Remove the two connectors of the fax control PCB
Screws
assembly.
2. Remove the three screws and remove the mounting Fax control PCB assembly
plate and the ground wire.
Ground wire
Mounting plate
Connectors
Figure 1-3-65
3. Insert the memory module DIMM at an angle into the

memory slot so that the notch of the memory DIMM
is positioned to the projection of the memory slot on
the fax control PCB assembly. (1)
4. Push the free end of the module down toward the
board. (2)
5. Attach the mounting plate and the ground wire that
have been removed by Procedure 2 with the three
screws to their original positions.
6. Connect the two connectors that have been removed
by Procedure 1.
Memory slot
Projection
Memory slot
Memory module DIMM
Memory slot
Notch Memory module DIMM

Memory module DIMM
Fax control PCB assembly
Figure 1-3-66
1-3-35
2DA/2DB
Remove the shield cover.

7. Remove the six screws, lift the shield cover and then
remove the cover. Shield cover
Screws
Screws
Figure 1-3-67
Remove the modular cover.

8. Remove the screw and take off the modular cover.
Screw
Modular cover
Figure 1-3-68
Attach the fax control PCB assembly.

9. Loosen the screw on the printer board.
10. While taking care that the mounting surface of the
board does not contact the frame section of the rear
cover, insert the U terminal of the ground wire of the
fax control PCB assembly and secure it with the
screw.
Screw
Ground wire
Fax control PCB assembly
Frame section
Figure 1-3-69
1-3-36
2DA/2DB
11. Connect the YC1 connector on the fax control PCB

assembly to the YC15 connector on the engine PCB.
12. Insert the fax control PCB assembly to the shield box
so that the projection of the fax control PCB
assembly is positioned to the slit of the shield box.
13. Secure the fax control PCB assembly using the three
TP tap tight screws M3 × 6.
Take care that the ground wire is not put on the frame
section of the rear cover.
Connector TP tap tight screw M3 × 6

YC15
Connector
YC1
Slit
Projection
Shield box
Fax control
PCB assembly
TP tap tight screws M3 × 6
Figure 1-3-70
Attach the NCU PCB assembly.

14. Connect the NCU wire connector on the NCU PCB Connector
assembly to the YC2 connector on the fax control NCU wire connector
PCB assembly.
YC2
NCU PCB assembly
Figure 1-3-71
15. Secure the NCU PCB assembly using the four TP Tape section
tap tight screws M3 × 6, paying attention so that the
tape section of the shield box does not contact with
the PCB.
NCU PCB assembly

Figure 1-3-72
1-3-37
2DA/2DB
Attach the modular cover.

16. Attach the modular cover that has been removed by
Procedure 8 with the screw to the position shown in
the illustration.
Screw Modular cover
Figure 1-3-73
Install the shield cover.

17. Insert the lower part of the shield cover that has been
removed by Procedure 7 into the shield box and then
attach it with the six screws and TP tap tight screw
M4 × 6 to its original position.
Screw Shield cover
Lower part
Screw
Screw
Shield box
TP tap tight
screw M4 × 6
Screws
Figure 1-3-74
Connect the telephone line to the line terminal.

18. Insert the modular connector cable to the line Line terminal
terminal to connect it to the telephone line. Modular connector cable
For 120 V specifications, use supplied modular cord
B.
Figure 1-3-75
1-3-38
2DA/2DB
Attach the operation section sheet for fax.

19. Insert the small screw driver into the two points of the
opening and remove the left cover of the operation Opening
section.
Left cover of
the operation section
Figure 1-3-76
20. Lift the two pawls and remove the operation section
sheet cover. Pawls
Operation section sheet cover
Figure 1-3-77
21. Remove the operation section sheet and replace it

Operation section sheet for fax
with the operation section sheet for fax of the
corresponding language.
Operation section sheet
Figure 1-3-78
1-3-39
2DA/2DB
22. Fit in the right-side two pawls of the operation section

sheet cover that has been removed by Procedure 20
and then attach the operation section sheet cover to Operation section sheet cover
its original position. Pawl
Pawl
Figure 1-3-79
Attach the one-touch securing sheet.

23. Remove the release paper from the one-touch
securing sheet.
24. Adhere the one-touch securing sheet on the base
frame of the one-touch key so that it sticks fast to the
surface while matching the top surface to the top left
corner and firmly pressing the whole area down as
shown in the illustration.
25. Push all the one-touch keys to check that the one-
touch securing sheet does not block any one-touch
key.
One-touch securing sheet
Figure 1-3-80
Attach the fax label (220-240 V specifications only). Fax label sheet Cover plate
26. Adhere the fax labels (1) to (4) of the fax label
sheet of the corresponding language at the positions
for the cover plate shown in the illustration.
Figure 1-3-81
1-3-40
2DA/2DB
Attach the cover plate.

27. Incurvate the cover plate a little and then insert the
upper and lower projections to the fitting parts of the
operation section to attach.
28. Check that the cover plate smoothly moves on either
side.
Projection
Cover plate
Projection
Figure 1-3-82
Attach the one-touch sheet.

29. Divide the one-touch sheet of the corresponding
language into two parts and then mount them on the
one-touch securing sheet each.
Bring back the left cover of the operation section that
has been removed by Procedure 19, operation
section sheet that has been removed by Procedure
21, operation section sheet for fax that corresponds
to the unused languages, and the one-touch sheet.
One-touch sheet
Figure 1-3-83
1-3-41
2DA/2DB
Attach the alphabet labels.

30. Take the alphabet labels from the one-touch label
sheet, and adhere them above the corresponding Alphabet labels
numeric keys on the operation panel after wiping the
panel with alcohol.
In Asia and Oceania, use the PQRS TUV WXYZ
label, and do not use the PRS TUV WXZ and OPER
labels.
Figure 1-3-84
Attach the certification label (120 V specifications

only).
31. Adhere the FCC68 label onto the shield cover after
wiping the cover with alcohol.
Shield cover
FCC68 label
10mm
10mm
Figure 1-3-85
Execute the maintenance mode.

After installation is complete, the fax control PCB must
be initialized by executing the maintenance mode U601/
U602.
(See the service manual of the fax system.)
1-3-42
2DA/2DB
1-3-11 Installing the scan system (option)
<Procedure>
Remove the covers.
1. Remove the six screws (a), lift the shield cover and Shield cover
then remove the cover. Cover
If the fax system is installed, remove the six screws
(a) and screw (b), lift the shield cover and then
remove the cover.
2. Remove the two screws, and take off the cover.
Screws (a)
Screw (b)
Screws
Screws (a)
Figure 1-3-86
Install the scanner board.
3. Insert the scanner board into the OPT1 opening of
the shield box and firmly push the CN5 connector on Connector
the scanner board all the way into the YC12 Connector OPT1 opening
connector on the engine circuit board.
Scanner board
YC12
CN5
Figure 1-3-87
4. Fasten the scanner board onto the shield box cover

Scanner board
using the two screws that have been removed by
Procedure 2.
Screws
Figure 1-3-88
1-3-43
2DA/2DB
Install the shield cover.

5. Insert the lower part of the shield cover that has been
removed by Procedure 1 into the shield box and refit Shield cover Screw (a)
it to its original position using the six screws (a).
If the fax system is installed, refit the shield cover
using the six screws (a) and screw (b) to its original
position. Screw (a)
Screw (a)
Screw (b)
Lower part
Screws (a)
Shield box
Figure 1-3-89
1-3-44
2DA/2DB
1-3-12 Installing the hard disk (option)

<Procedure>
1. Remove the two screws of the slot for OPT2 which is
on the machine right back, and then remove the
cover. Socket
2. Insert the hard disk in the socket on the printer board
PCB.
3. Refit the cover which is removed with step 1.
4. Turn the power switch on and initialize the hard disk
at the printer menu.
5. Output the printer status report and confirm whether
the hard disk is recognized.
Hard disk
Figure 1-3-90
1-3-45
2DA/2DB
1-4-1 Maintenance mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the up/down cursor keys
The maintenance item is
or numeric keys.
selected.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter “001” using the up/down

cursor keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
1-4-1
2DA/2DB-1
(2) Maintenance modes item list
Item Initial
Section Maintenance item contents
No. setting*
General U000 Outputting an own-status report —
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode —
U002 Setting the factory default data —
U003 Setting the service telephone number ***************
U004 Displaying the machine number —
U005 Copying without paper —
U019 Displaying the ROM version —
Initialization U020 Initializing all data —
U021 Initializing memories —
U022 Initializing backup memory —
U026 Evacuation of backup data —
U027 Return of backup data —
Drive, paper U030 Checking motor operation —
feed, paper U031 Checking switches for paper conveying —
conveying and
U032 Checking clutch operation —
cooling system
U034 Adjusting the print start timing
• Adjusting the leading edge registration 0.9/1.2/1.3/
1.3/1.3/1.0
• Adjusting the center line -1.0/0.4/-1.2
-1.2/-1.2/0.3
• Adjusting the trailing edge margin 0.0
U035 Setting folio size
• Length/Width 330
• Width 210
U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper 20/0/0/-20/-20/0
U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed 0.1/0/-0.5/0.1/
-0.1/-0.3/-0.3/
-1.3/-1.5
Optical U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties 12
U061 Turning the exposure lamp on —
U063 Adjusting the shading position 0
U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification
• Main scanning direction/auxiliary scanning direction 0/-10
U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the 7/0
contact glass
U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass -4/0
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP 0
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification 0/0
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0/0/0/0
U072 Adjusting the DP center line 0/0/0
U073 Checking scanner operation —
U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity 0
U076 Executing DP automatic adjustment —
U087 Turning the DP scanning position adjust mode on/off —
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern —
U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically —
U093 Setting the exposure density gradient
• Text and photo/text/photo/text in fax mode/photo in fax mode 0/0/0/2/3
U099 Checking the original size detection —
* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020

1-4-2
2DA/2DB-1
Item Initial
No. setting*
High voltage U100 Checking the operation of main high voltage 132/60/50/10
U101 Setting high voltages
• Developing bias 27/45/22/45
• Transfer voltage 166/177/37/35
• Separation voltage 1/35/42
U110 Checking/clearing the drum count —
Developing U130 Initial setting for the developer —
U144 Setting toner loading operation OFF
U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time —
U158 Checking the developing count —
Fixing and U161 Setting the fixing control temperature
cleaning • Primary stabilization fixing temperature 140
• Secondary stabilization fixing temperature 160
• Copying operation temperature 1 170
• Copying operation temperature 2 180
• Number of sheets for fixing control 5
• Number of sheets for fixing control (thick paper) 20
U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly —
U163 Resetting the fixing problem data —
U167 Checking/clearing fixing counts —
U199 Checking the fixing temperature —
Operation U200 Turning all LEDs on —
panel and U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system —
support U203 Checking DP operation —
equipment
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter —
U207 Checking the operation panel keys —
U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors and solenoids —
U244 Checking the DP switches —
U245 Checking messages —
U246 Setting the finisher 4/4/4
U249 Checking the paper ejection to optional devices —
Mode setting U250 Setting the maintenance cycle 150000
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count —
U252 Setting the destination Japan
U253 Switching between double and single counts Double count
U254 Turning auto start function on/off On
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection Single mode
U260 Changing the copy count timing After ejection
U264 Setting the display order of the date Inch
specifications:
MONTH-DATE-YEAR
Metric
specifications:
DATE-MONTH-YEAR
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code —
U277 Setting auto application change time 30
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication ON
U332 Setting the size conversion factor —
U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function —
U342 Setting the ejection restriction On
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Off

1-4-3
2DA/2DB-1
Item Initial
No. setting*
Mode setting U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode Inch
specifications:
ENERGY STAR
Metric
specifications:
GEEA
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication —
Image U402 Adjusting margins of image printing 3.0/3.0/4.0
processing U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass 2.0/3.0/2.0/2.0
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP 2.0/3.0/2.0/2.0
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing 0.0
Network U504 Initializing the scanner NIC —
scanner U506 Setting the time out 10
Others U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations —
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts —
U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts —
U905 Checking counts by optional devices —
U906 Resetting partial operation control —
U908 Changing the total counter value —
U910 Clearing the black ratio data —
U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes —
U917 Setting backup data reading/writing —
U920 Checking the accounting counts —
U925 Checking/clearing the system error counts —
U926 Rewriting FAX program —
U927 Clearing the all accounting counts and machine life counts —
U928 Checking machine life counts —
U941 Setting the default magnification ratio of the default drawer —
U942 Adjusting the DP amount of slack in the original 0
U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light —
U991 Checking the scanner count —
U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern —

1-4-4
2DA/2DB
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000 Outputting an own-status report
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to
reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be output using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Output list
MAINTENANCE List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
JAM List of the paper jam occurrences
SERVICE CALL List of the service call occurrences
3. Press the start key. The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/11" × 81/2" paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed location.
When output is complete, the screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
U002 Setting the factory default data
Description
Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings.
Purpose
To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport (position in which the frame can be fixed).
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport.
Completion
The power switch turns off.
1-4-5
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U003 Setting the service telephone number
Description
Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected.
Purpose
To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set telephone number is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a telephone number (up to 15 digits) using the numeric keys.
Move the cursor using the left/right cursor keys and select a number or symbol using the up/down cursor
keys.
To enter symbols, press the keys shown below as required.
Key Symbol
∗ key ∗
# key #
Image mode selection key (
Aoto mode selection key )
Lighter key –
Darker key Space
2. Press the start key. The phone number is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U004 Displaying the machine number
Description
Displays the machine number.
Purpose
To check the machine number.
Method
Press the start key. The currently machine number is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-6
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U005 Copying without paper
Description
Simulates the copy operation without paper feed.
Purpose
To check the overall operation of the machine.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Operation
PPC Only the MFP operates.
PPC + DP Both the MFP and DP operate (continuous operation).
3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.
4. Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen. Changes in the following settings can be
made.
• Paper feed locations
• Magnifications
• Simplex or duplex copy mode
• Number of copies: in simplex copy mode, continuous copying is performed when set to 999; in duplex
copy mode, continuous copying is performed regardless of the setting.
• Copy density
• Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver (preheat) key
5. To control the paper feed pulley, remove all the paper in the drawers, or the drawers. With the paper
present, the paper feed pulley does not operate.
6. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. When operation is complete, the
screen for selecting an item is displayed.
7. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
displayed.
1-4-7
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U019 Displaying the ROM version
Description
Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PCB.
Purpose
To check the part number or to decide if the ROM version is new from the last digit of the number.
Method
1. Press the start key. The part number indicating the ROM version are displayed.
2. Change the screen using the up/down cursor keys.
Display Description
MAIN Main ROM IC
ENGINE Engine ROM IC
LANG(St) Standard language ROM IC
LANG(Op) Optional language ROM IC
MAIN BOOT Boot of main ROM IC
PRINTER Printer board ROM IC
NWS Network scanner*1 ROM IC
DP DP*1 ROM IC
FINISHER Finisher*1 ROM IC
CASS2 First paper feeder*2 ROM IC
CASS3 Second paper feeder*1 ROM IC
CASS4 Third paper feeder*1 ROM IC
*1: Optional. *2: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model.
Completion
U020 Initializing all data
Description
Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PCB to return to the original settings.
Purpose
Run as needed.
Method
3. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized, and the original settings for Japan
specifications are set.
When initialization is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main
switch is turned on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U021 Initializing memories
Description
Initializes the setting data other than that for adjustments due to variations between respective machines, i.e.,
settings for counters, service call history and mode settings. As a result, initializes the backup RAM according
to the specifications depending on the destination selected in U252.
Purpose
Used to return the machine settings to the factory settings.
Method
3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is
initialized based on the destination setting.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-8
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U022 Initializing backup memory
Description
Initializes only the data set for the optical section or initializes various setting data when installing the optional
network scanner board.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the scanner unit or installing the network scanner board.
Method
3. Press the start key. The data for the optical section (U060 to 067, U092 to 099, U403, U990 and U991) is
initialized.
The setting data of scanner function initial settings are initialized, and the registered transmission and
reception are cleared.
Completion
U026 Evacuation of backup data
Description
Transfers the backup data of the main PCB to the EEPROM.
Purpose
Used when replacing the main PCB.
Method
3. Press the start key to transfer the backup data.
The screen displays the result.
EXECUTE
CHECK SUM: ∗∗∗∗
CODE : XXXX (See the table below)
Code Description
0000 Processing ends correctly.
0101 Verification abnormality occurs.
0102 Verification abnormality occurs at the time of check sum entry.
4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
1-4-9
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U027 Return of backup data
Description
Transfers the backup data of the EEPROM which was transferred with the U026 to flash memory.
Purpose
To use after the main PCB replaced.
Method
3. Press the start key to transfer the backup data.
The screen displays the result.
EXECUTE
CHECK SUM: ∗∗∗∗
CODE : XXXX (See the table below)
Code Description
0000 Processing ends correctly.
0203 Check sum does not agree when reading out from the EEPROM.
4. Disconnect and connect the power plug.

Completion
U030 Checking motor operation
Description
Drives each motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor.
Method
2. Select the motor to be operated using the up/down cursor keys.
Display Operation
MAIN Drive motor (DM) operates
RES Registration motor (RM) operates
T1 Drawer drive motor 1*2 (DDM1) operates
EJE1 Eject motor rotates forward
EJE2 Eject motor rotates in reverse
4. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-10
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U031 Checking switches for paper conveying
Description
Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path.
Purpose
To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly.
Method
1. Press the start key. A list of the switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed.
2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse.
Display Switches
EJE Eject switch (ESW)
RES Registration switch (RSW)
PF2 Drawer feed switch 1*2 (DFSW1)
PF3 Drawer feed switch 2*1 (DFSW2)
BRA Feedshift switch (FSSW)
DUP Duplex paper conveying switch*1 (DUPPCSW)
JOB Job separator eject switch*1 (JBESW)
Completion
U032 Checking clutch operation
Description
Turns each clutch on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each clutch.
Method
2. Select the clutch to be operated using the up/down cursor keys.
3. Press the start key. The clutch turns on for 1 s.
Display Clutches
PF1 Paper feed clutch (PFCL)
PFBYP Bypass paper feed solenoid (BYPPFSOL)
FEED1 Drawer paper feed clutch 1*2 (DPFCL1)
Completion
1-4-11
2DA/2DB-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U034 Adjusting the print start timing
Adjustment
See pages 1-6-16 and 18.
U035 Setting folio size
Description
Changes the image area for copying onto folio size paper.
Purpose
To prevent the image at the trailing edge, or right or left side of the paper from not being copied by setting the
actual size of the folio paper used.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the left/right cursor keys.
Display Setting Setting range Initial setting
LENGTH DATA Length 330 to 356 mm 330
WIDTH DATA Width 200 to 220 mm 210
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Completion
U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
Adjustment
See page 1-6-21.
U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed
Description
Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
Purpose
Used to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct. Also speed adjustment
for each paper source.
Method
Setting
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
MAIN Drive motor speed adjustment –5.0 to +5.0 0.1
POLY Polygon motor speed adjustment –5.0 to +5.0 0
EJE Eject motor speed adjustment –5.0 to +5.0 –0.5
RES Registration motor speed adjustment –5.0 to +5.0 –0.1
BYP Motor speed adjustment –5.0 to +5.0 –0.1
(for paper feed from bypass tray)
CAS Drawer paper feed motor speed adjustment –5.0 to +5.0 –0.3
(for paper feed from paper feeder)
DUP Duplex paper feed motor speed adjustment –5.0 to +5.0 –0.3
(in duplex mode)
EJE2 Optional ejection correction value of eject motor –5.0 to +5.0 –1.3
(In the case of paper width more than 220 mm)
EJE3 Optional ejection correction value of eject motor –5.0 to +5.0 –1.5
(In the case of paper width less than or equal to 220 mm)
1-4-12
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U053 MAIN MOTOR
Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction, and decreasing it makes
the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction.
POLYGON MOTOR
Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliary
scanning direction; decreasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and
longer in the auxiliary scanning direction.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, a VTC pattern shown below is output in interrupt copy mode.
1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the interrupt copy mode.
2. Press the start key. A VTC pattern is output.
To return to the screen for setting, press the interrupt key.
Correct values for an A3/11" × 17" output are:
A = 300 ± 1.5 mm
B = 270 ± 1.35 mm
Figure 1-4-1
Adjustment
1. Output an A3/11" × 17" VTC pattern in interrupt copy mode.
2. Measure A and B on the VTC pattern (Figure 1-4-1), and perform the following adjustments if they are
different from the correct sizes:
A: Drive motor speed adjustment
B: Polygon motor speed adjustment
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-13
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties
Description
Adjusts the image scanning density in text, text and photo, or photo mode.
Purpose
Used when the entire image appears too dark or light.
Method
Setting
Descrition Setting range Initial setting
Image scannnig density 1 to +23 12
Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it makes the density higher.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode.
2. Set the original and press the strat key.
Completion
U061 Turning the exposure lamp on
Description
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
To check the exposure lamp.
Method
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
1-4-14
2DA/2DB-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U063 Adjusting the shading position
Description
Changes the shading position.
Purpose
Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. This is
due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should be changed
so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for setting is displayed.
Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
Shading position –8 to +8 0 0.17 mm
Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right, and decreasing it moves the
position toward the machine left.
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification
Adjustment
See pages 1-6-33 and 34.
U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 1-6-35.
U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 1-6-36.
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP
Description
Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP.
Purpose
Used when there is a regular error between the leading edges of the original and the copy image when the DP
is used.
Method
Setting
Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
Scanning position –17 to +17 0 0.17 mm
Increasing the setting moves the image backward, and decreasing it moves the image forward.
Completion
1-4-15
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning speed.
Purpose
To be executed if the correct magnification is not obtained in the auxiliary scanning direction when the optional
DP is used.
Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
U053 U065 U070
Method
Setting
Change in
Display Description Setting range Initial setting value per step
CONVEY SPEED1 Original conveying motor –25 to +25 0 0.1%

speed (simplex original)
CONVEY SPEED2 Original conveying motor –25 to +25 0 0.1%
speed (duplex original)
Increasing the setting makes the image longer, and decreasing it makes the image shorter.
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
1-4-16
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
To be executed if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy
image when the optional DP is used.
Caution
U034 U066 U071
Method
Press the start key. The screen for setting an item is displayed.
Setting
Change in
LEAD1 DP leading edge registration –32 to +22 0 0.2 mm

(simplex original)
TRAIL1 DP trailing edge registration –22 to +32 0 0.2 mm
(simplex original)
LEAD2 DP leading edge registration –32 to +22 0 0.2mm
(duplex original)
TRAIL2 DP trailing edge registration –22 to +32 0 0.2mm
(duplex original)
Increasing the setting moves the copy image backward, and decreasing it moves the copy image forward.
Interrupt copy mode
Adjustment
1. In interrupt copy mode, make a copy using the DP.
2. Check the copy image and adjust the registration as follows.
For copy example 1, decrease the setting of LEAD1 or LEAD2.
For copy example 2, increase the setting of LEAD1 or LEAD2.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-4-2
Completion
1-4-17
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U072 Adjusting the DP center line
Description
Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original.
Purpose
To be executed if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the
optional DP is used.
Caution
U034 U067 U072
Method
Setting
Change in
1 sided Simplex copy mode –39 to +39 0 0.1 mm

2 sided front Front face in duplex copy mode –39 to +39 0 0.1 mm
2 sided back Reverse face in duplex copy mode –39 to +39 0 0.1 mm
Increasing the setting moves the image to the right, and decreasing it moves the image to the left.
Interrupt copy mode
Adjustment
1. In interrupt copy mode, make a copy using the DP.
2. Check the copy image and adjust the center line as follows.
For copy example 1, increase the setting.
For copy example 2, decrease the setting.
Reference
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-4-3
Completion
1-4-18
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U073 Checking scanner operation
Description
Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check scanner operation.
Method
2. Select the item to be changed using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Operating conditions Setting range
ZOOM Magnification 100 to 400%
SIZE Original size See below.
LAMP On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on)
Original sizes for each setting in SIZE
Setting Paper size Setting Paper size
8 A4 42 A5R
9 B5 47 Folio
24 11" × 81/2" 52 11" × 17"
36 A3 53 11" × 15"
39 B4 55 81/2" × 14"
40 A4R 56 81/2" × 11"
41 B5R 58 51/2" × 81/2"
4. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity
Description
Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DP.
Purpose
Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass and
when scanning an original from the DP.
Method
Setting
Description Setting range Initial setting
DP input light luminosity 0 to 8 0
Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower.
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
1-4-19
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U076 Executing DP automatic adjustment
Description
Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the DP scanning section.
• Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)
• Adjusting the DP scanning timing (U071)
• Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When you run this maintenance mode, the preset values of U070, U071 and U072 will also be updated.
Purpose
To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the DP scanning section.
Method
1. Set a specified original (part number: 2AC68241) in the DP.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is
displayed.
Display Description
CONVEY SPEED DP magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction
LEAD EDGE ADJ DP leading edge registration
DP CENTER DP original center line
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and
operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure
from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance
items.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is
displayed.
If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
1-4-20
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U087 Turning the DP scanning position adjust mode on/off
Description
Turns on or off the DP scanning position adjust mode, in which the DP original scanning position is adjusted
automatically by determining the presence or absence of dust on the slit glass. Also changes the reference
data for identifying dust.
Reference
In the DP original scanning position adjust mode, the presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing
the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original
scanning position. If dust is identified, the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.
Purpose
Used to prevent appearance of black lines due to dust adhering in the original scanning position on the slit
glass when the DP is used.
Setting
2. Select ON or OFF using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON DP scanning position adjust mode on
OFF DP scanning position adjust mode off
Initial setting: ON
Available only when the mode is turned on.

Minimum density to be regarded as dust 10 to 95 35
Example
The figure indicates the density in 256 levels of gray (0: white, 255: black). When the setting is 35, data of
the level of 35 or higher is regarded as dust and data of lower level is regarded as the background (scan
data taken when there is no original).
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-4-21
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern
Description
Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the machine.
Purpose
When performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that of
the scanner with a non-scanned output MIP-PG pattern.
Method
2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output using the up/down cursor keys.
Display PG pattern to be output Purpose

GRAYSCALE To check the laser scanner unit
engine output characteristics.
MONO-LEVEL To check the drum quality.
256-LEVEL To check resolution

reproducibility in printing.
1 DOT-LEVEL To check fine line reproducibility.

To adjust the position of the laser
scanner unit (lateral squareness)
3. To change the output conditions of MONO-LEVEL and 1dot-LEVEL, use the left/right cursor keys to
change the preset values and press the start key to register the setting.
Display Setting range Initial setting
Output density of MONO-LEVEL 0 or 35 0
1dot-LEVEL 0 to 21 0
5. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-22
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Makes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original.
• Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
• Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
• Adjusting scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065)
When this maintenance item is performed, the settings in U065, U066 and U067 are also changed.
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner.
Method
1. Place the specified original (P/N: 2A068020) on the contact glass.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is
displayed.
Display Description
SCN CENTER Scanner center line
SCN TIMING Scanner leading registration
SUB SCAN Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction
MAIN SCAN Scanner magnification in the main scanning direction
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and
operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure
from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance
items.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
1-4-23
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U093 Setting the exposure density gradient
Description
Changes the exposure density gradient in manual density mode, depending on respective image modes (text,
text and photo, photo, text in fax mode, photo in fax mode).
Purpose
To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment. Also used to
make copy image darker or lighter.
Start
2. Select the image mode to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys and press the start key. The screen
for the selected item is displayed.
Display Description
MIXED Density in text and photo mode
TEXT Density in text mode
PHOTO Density in photo mode
FAX TEXT Density in the text in fax mode
FAX PHOTO Density in the photo in fax mode
Setting: Density in text and photo mode

1. Select the item to be adjusted using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Adjust the setting using the left/right cursor keys.
MIXED DARKER Change in density when manual 0 to 3 0
density is set dark
MIXED LIGHTER Change in density when manual 0 to 3 0
density is set light
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
Image density Setting: 0

Setting: 3
Dark
Set to LIGHTER
Set to DARKER
Light
Density adjustment
Light Center Dark
Figure 1-4-4 Exposure density gradient

4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting: Density in text mode
TEXT DARKER Change in density when manual 0 to 3 0
density is set dark
TEXT LIGHTER Change in density when manual 0 to 3 0
1-4-24
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U093 Setting: Density in photo mode
PHOTO DARKER Change in density when manual 0 to 3 0
density is set dark
PHOTO LIGHTER Change in density when manual 0 to 3 0
Setting: Density in the text in fax mode
FAX TEXT DARKER Change in density when manual 0 to 4 2
density is set dark
FAX TEXT LIGHTER Change in density when manual 0 to 9 2
Setting: Density in the photo in fax mode
FAX PHOTO DARKER Change in density when manual 0 to 6 3
density is set dark
FAX PHOTO LIGHT. Change in density when manual 0 to 6 3
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
displayed.
1-4-25
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U099 Checking the original size detection
Description
Checks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value.
Purpose
To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensor
malfunctions frequently due to incident light or the like.
Start
2. Select an item using the up/down cursor keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
Display Description
DATA Displaying detection sensor transmission data
B/W LEVEL Setting detection sensor threshold value
Setting original size judgment time
Method to display the data for the sensor

1. Press the start key. The detection sensor transmission data is displayed.
Rear of machine : 123 123 123

Center of machine : 123 123 123
Front of machine : 255 255 255
Figure 1-4-5
Setting
1. Select an item to be set using the up/down cursor keys.
LEVEL Detection sensor threshold value 0 to 255 170
WAIT TIME Original size judgment time* 0 to 100 30
A4R AREA Threshold value in the main scan direction 220 (mm)/ 240
for A4R detection 240 (mm)
ORG AREA Original size detection position display (mm) 0 to 350 –
SIZE Detected original size display 0 to 63 –
* Time from activation of the original detection switch (ODSW) to original size judgment
Method to set the detection threshold value
1. Adjust the preset value using the left/right cursor keys.
A larger value increases the sensor sensitivity, and a smaller value decreases it.
Method to set the original size judgment time
1. Adjust the preset value using the left/right cursor keys.
A larger value increases the original size judgment time, and a smaller value decreases it.
Completion
1-4-26
2DA/2DB-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U100 Setting the main high voltage
Description
Changes the surface potential by changing the grid control voltage. Also performs main charging. Also
changes the setting of main charging copy quantity correction.
Purpose
To set the surface potential or check main charging. Also used when reentering data after initializing the set
data.
Start
2. Select the item using the up/down cursor keys.
Display Description
MC DATA Changing the grid control voltage
MC ON Turning the main charger on
LASER ON/OFF Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off
INTERVAL Main charging copy quantity correction, copy interval
COPY CNT Main charging copy quantity correction, copy quantity
MC ADJUST Main charging copy quantity correction, correction amount
Method for main charger output

1. Press the start key. The selected operation starts.
Setting the grid control voltage
Grid control voltage 0 to 255 132
Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher, and decreasing it makes the potential lower.
Setting the main charging copy quantity correction
Display Setting Setting range Initial setting
INTERVAL Copy interval 1 to 255 (minute) 60
COPY CNT Copy quantity 1 to 255 (10 sheets) 50
MC ADJUST Correction amount 0 to 50 (bit) 10
Copy interval: Sets the time interval from the previous copying. If the time from the previous copying
exceeds this preset value, the copy quantity counter will be reset.
Copy quantity: Sets the copy quantity from which copy quantity correction starts. When the copy quantity
counter reaches this preset value, correction will start.
Correction amount: Sets the correction amount for copy quantity correction.
Set the values in the range from 5 to 120 minutes for copy interval, from 10 to 2,000 sheets for copy
quantity, and from 5 to 50 bits for correction amount.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when main charger output stops while a selection item is displayed. The indication for
selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-4-27
2DA/2DB-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U101 Setting the other high voltages
Description
Changes the developing bias voltage and transfer/separation voltage.
Purpose
To check the developing bias and the transfer/separation voltage or to take measures against drop of image
density or background fog.
Method
2. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
Display Description
DEV Setting the developing bias
TC Setting the transfer voltage
SC Setting the separation voltage
Setting the developing bias

BIAS C Developing bias clock frequency (copier mode) 2 to 255 27
DUTY C Developing bias clock duty (copier mode) 1 to 99 45
BIAS P Developing bias clock frequency (printer mode) 2 to 255 22
DUTY P Developing bias clock duty (printer mode) 1 to 99 45
Increasing the BIAS C/P setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.
Increasing the DUTY C/P setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.
Setting the transfer voltage
TC DATA1 Transfer control voltage (large size) 0 to 255 166
TC DATA2 Transfer control voltage (small size) 0 to 255 177
OFF TIMING Transfer charging output OFF timing 0 to 255 37
ON TIMING Transfer charging output ON timing 0 to 255 35
Setting the separation voltage
SC SEL Separation control voltage 0 to 2 1
SC ON TIMING Separation charging output ON timing 0 to 255 35
SC OFF TIMING Separation charging output OFF timing 0 to 255 42
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
1-4-28
2DA/2DB-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U110 Checking/clearing the drum count
Description
Displays the drum counts for checking, clearing the figure.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the count after replacing the durm during regular maintenance.
Since the count was cleared before shipping, do not clear it when installing. A drum count value less than 150K,
however, cannot be cleared.
Method
1. Press the start key. The drum counter count is displayed.
2. Select the CLEAR using the up/down cursor keys.
If the counter value is 150K or less, CLEAR is not displayed.
3. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit the maintenance mode without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
U130 Initial setting for the developer
Description
Replenishes toner to the developer unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed.
Purpose
To operate when installing the machine.
Method
2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys.
3. Press the start key. Installation of toner starts and time (minutes) is indicated until the installation ends.
4. When the installation is complete, FINISHED will be displayed if the installation is successful or NG will be
displayed if it has failed.
If NG is displayed, check to see if the toner container contains toner and to see if the toner container sensor
malfunctions and then try again.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after operation is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U144 Setting toner loading operation
Description
Sets toner loading operation after completion of copying.
Purpose
To set whether or not toner is loaded on the drum after low density copying. Normally no change is necessary
from the initial setting.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select either ON or OFF using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Toner loaded
OFF Toner not loaded
Initial setting: OFF
Completion
1-4-29
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time
Description
Displays the developing drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure.
Purpose
To check the developing drive time. Also used to clear the count after replacing the developing unit.
Method
Press the start key. The developing drive time is displayed in minutes.
Clearing
2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a seven-digit drive time (in minutes) using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
U158 Checking the developing count
Description
Displays the developing count for checking a figure.
Purpose
To check the developing count.
Method
Press the start key. The developing count is displayed.
Completion
U161 Setting the fixing control temperature
Description
Changes the fixing control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve a
fixing problem on thick paper.
Setting
2. Select the item to be set using the up/down cursor keys. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
1ST TEMP Primary stabilization fixing temperature 120 to 185 (°C) 140
2ND TEMP Secondary stabilization fixing temperature 120 to 185 (°C) 160
COPY TEMP1 Copying operation temperature 1 160 to 220 (°C) 170
COPY TEMP2 Copying operation temperature 2 160 to 220 (°C) 180
COPY CNT Number of sheets for fixing control 1 to 99 5
THICK CNT Number of sheets for fixing control (thick paper) 1 to 99 20
Copying operation temperature 1: Temperature in copying operation at the start of copying
Copying operation temperature 2: Temperature in copying operation after the specified number of sheets
for fixing control have passed
Number of sheets for fixing control: The number of sheets to be counted for switching from copying
operation temperature 1 to copying operation temperature 2
The temperatures are to be set such that Secondary stabilization > = Primary stabilization.
Completion
1-4-30
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly
Description
Stops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly, regardless of fixing temperature.
Purpose
To forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches stabilization temperature.
Method
2. Press the start key. The forced stabilization mode is entered, and stabilization operation stops regardless
of fixing temperature. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
To exit the forced stabilization mode, turn the power off and on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing forced fixing stabilization, press the stop/clear key.The screen
for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U163 Resetting the fixing problem data
Description
Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fixing section.
Purpose
To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fixing temperature.
Method
2. Select the EXECUTE using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key. The fixing problem data is initialized.
Completion
U167 Checking/clearing fixing counts
Description
Displays or clears fixing counts.
Purpose
To check fixing counts. Also used to clear the count after replacing the fixing unit.
Method
Press the start key. The fixing counts are displayed.
Clearing
Completion
U199 Checking the fixing temperature
Description
Displays the fixing temperature, the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity.
Purpose
To check the fixing temperature, the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity.
Method
Press the start key. The fixing temperature and ambient temperature are displayed in centigrade (°C) and the
absolute humidity is displayed in percentage (%).
Display Description
FIX TEMP Fixing temperature (°C)
SURROUND TEMP Ambient temperature (°C)
HUMIDITY Absolute humidity (%)
Completion
1-4-31
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U200 Turning all LEDs on
Description
Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.
Purpose
To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Method
Press the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Press the stop/clear key or wait for 10 s. The LEDs turns off, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item
No. is displayed.
U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system
Description
Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting
is necessary.
U203 Checking DP operation
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional DP.
Purpose
To check the DP.
Method
2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the item to be operated using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Operation
ADP With paper, single-sided original
RADP With paper, double-sided original
ADP (NON-P) Without paper, single-sided original (continuous operation)
RADP (NON-P) Without paper, double-sided original (continuous operation)
5. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
1-4-32
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed.
Setting
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed
2. Select the optional counter to be installed using the up/down cursor keys. The selected counter is
displayed in reverse.
Display Description
OFF None
KEY-CARD The key card is installed
KEY-COUNTER The key counter is installed
3. Press the start key. The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
U207 Checking the operation panel keys
Description
Checks operation of the operation panel keys.
Purpose
To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
2. COUNT1 is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights.
3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom,
the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1. When all the keys in that line are pressed
and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right, the top LED in that
line will light.
4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds.
5. When the LEDs go off, press the start key. All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again.
Completion
1-4-33
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors and solenoids
Description
Turns the motors or solenoids in the optional DP on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the DP motors and solenoids.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated using the up/down cursor keys.
Display Motors, solenoids and clutch Operation In operation
F MOT Original feed motor (OFM) In operation
C MOT Original paper conveying motor (OCM) In operation
RJ SL Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) On for 0.5 s
RP SL Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) On for 0.5 s
3. To turn each motor off, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U244 Checking the DP switches
Description
Displays the status of the respective switches in the optional DP.
Purpose
To check if respective switches in the optional DP operate correctly.
Start
2. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status.
If the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse.
Display Switches
SET SW Original set switch (OSSW)
TMG SW DP timing switch (DPTSW)
MAT SW DP open/close switch (DPOCSW)
COV SW DP original cover switch (DPOCSW)
REV SW Original switchback switch (OSBSW)
SZ A SW Original size length switch (OSLSW)
Completion
1-4-34
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U245 Checking messages
Description
Displays a list of messages or graphics on the operation panel.
Purpose
To check the messages or graphics to be displayed.
Method
2. Select the item to be displayed using the up/down cursor keys.
3. Press the start key. The selected item is displayed.
Display Description
Check display messages Check the messages
Check display graphics Check the graphics
Method to display the messages

1. Change the screen using the up/down cursor keys to display each message one at a time.
You can select the language using the left/right cursor keys.
Method to display the graphics
1. Change the screen using the up/down cursor keys to display each graphic one at a time.
You can select the background (black or white) using the left/right cursor keys.
Completion
displayed.
U246 Setting the finisher
Description
Adjusts the side registration cursor stop position in the staple sort mode.
Purpose
To adjust when registration is not proper or staple position is shifted in the staple sort mode.
Setting
2. Select the desired cursor position using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in
reverse.
FRONT Front side registration cursor stop position 0 to +8 4
REAR Rear side registration cursor stop position 0 to +8 4
END Trailing edge registration cursor stop position 0 to +8 4
Completion
displayed.
1-4-35
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U249 Checking the paper ejection to optional devices
Description
Ejects paper to an optional job separator.
Purpose
To check paper conveying operation to optional job separator.
Method
1. While pressing the feedshift switch by your hand, press the start key. Paper transfer operation starts.
Completion
U250 Setting the maintenance cycle
Description
Displays and changes the maintenance cycle.
Purpose
To check and change the maintenance cycle.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys. To clear, press the reset key.
Maintenance cycle 0 to 9999999 150000
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
1-4-36
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count
Description
Displays, clears and changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
To check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service.
Method
Press the start key. The maintenance count is displayed.
Clearing
Setting
1. Select the COUNT using the up/down cursor keys.
2. Enter a seven-digit count using the numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
U252 Setting the destination
Description
Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB or initializing the backup RAM by running
maintenance item U020, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization.
Method
Setting
1. Select the destination using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
JAPAN METRIC Metric (Japan) specifications
INCH Inch (North America) specifications
EUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specifications
ASIA PACIFIC Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the machine automatically returns to the same status as when
the power is turned on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
Supplement
The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below. To
change the initial settings in those items, be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destination.
• Initial setting according to the destinations
Maintenance Title Japan Inch Europe Metric,
item No. Asia Pacific
253 Switching between double and single counts Single Double Double
1-4-37
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U253 Switching between double and single counts
Description
Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
According to user (copy service provider) request, select if A3/11" × 17" paper is to be counted as one sheet
(single count) or two sheets (double count).
Method
Setting
1. Select double or single count using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
SINGLE COUNT Single count for all size paper
DOUBLE COUNT (A3/LEDGER) Double count for A3/11" × 17" paper only
DOUBLE COUNT (B4) Double count for B4 size or larger
Initial setting: DOUBLE COUNT
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
U254 Turning auto start function on/off
Description
Selects if the auto start function is turned on.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. If incorrect operation occurs, turn the function off: this may solve the
problem.
Method
Setting
Display Description
ON Auto start function on
OFF Auto start function off
Initial setting: ON
Completion
1-4-38
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection
Description
Selects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected, and sets the number of copies that can
be made after the detection.
Purpose
To be set according to user request.
Method
Setting
1. Select single or continuous copying using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in
reverse.
Display Description
SINGLE Enables only single copying.
CONTINUE Enables single and continuous copying.
Initial setting: SINGLE
Completion
U260 Changing the copy count timing
Description
Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
To be set according to user (copy service provider) request.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper
ejection, copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying.
To prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fixing sections when the number of copies is counted
before the paper reaches those sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To prevent this, the
copy timing should be made later.
Method
Setting
1. Select the copy count timing using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
FEED When secondary paper feed starts
EJECT When the paper is ejected
Initial setting: EJECT
Completion
1-4-39
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U264 Setting the display order of the date
Description
Selects year, month and day as the order of that appears on lists, etc.
Purpose
Set according to the user preference.
Method
Setting
2. Select the desired order using the up/down cursor keys.
Display Setting
YEAR-MONTH-DATE Year/Month/Day
MONTH-DATE-YEAR Month/Day/Year
DATE-MONTH-YEAR Day/Month/Year
Initial setting: "MONTH-DATE-YEAR" (for the inch specifications)
"DATE-MONTH-YEAR" (for the metric specifications)
Completion
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code
Description
Sets the OEM purchaser code.
Purpose
Sets the code when replacing the main PCB and the like.
Method
Setting
1. Use the numeric keys or left/right cursor keys to adjust the preset value.
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
Completion
selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
U277 Setting auto application change time
Description
Sets the time that passes until the machine starts automatically printing after completing copying or operation
when the machine is used as a printer or fax.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
Switching time 30 to 270 (s) 30
The setting can be changed by 30 s per step.
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
1-4-40
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication
Description
Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish
on the contact glass when scanning from the optional DP.
Method
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF using the up/down cursor keys.
Display Description
ON Displays the cleaning guidance
OFF Not to display the cleaning guidance
Initial setting: ON
Completion
U332 Setting the size conversion factor
Description
Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/11" × 81/2" size. The coefficient set here is used to
convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/11" × 81/2" size and to display the result in user simulation.
Purpose
To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/11" × 81/2" size for
copy mode, printer mode and fax mode respectively.
Method
Setting
1. Select copier mode (COPY), printer mode (PRT) or fax mode (FAX) using the up/down cursor keys.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
COPY Size parameter for copier mode 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
PRINTER Size parameter for printer mode 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
FAX Size parameter for fax mode 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
Completion
1-4-41
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function
Description
Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output.
Purpose
To use a paper feed location only for printer output.
Method
2. Select the paper feed location for the printer using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed
in reverse.
Display Description
PF1 Drawer
PF2 First paper feeder*2
PF3 Second paper feeder*1
PF4 Third paper feeder*1
0: OFF 1: ON
4. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
U342 Setting the ejection restriction
Description
Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously.
When the restriction is set, the number of sheets that can be ejected continuously to the internal eject tray will
be limited to 250.
Purpose
According to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets.
Method
Setting
Display Description
ON Sets restriction on the number of sheets
OFF Cancels restriction on the number of sheets
Initial setting: ON
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selectiong a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-42
2DA/2DB-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode
Description
Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode.
Method
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Duplex copy
OFF Simplex copy
Initial setting: OFF
Completion
U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode
Description
Changes the control for preheat/energy saver mode.
Purpose
According to user request, selects which has priority, the recovery time from preheat or energy saver.
Method
Setting
1. Select control mode using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Control in preheat mode
ENERGY STAR The fixing control temperature is lowered by 20°C/68°F and forced
stabilization is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat.
GEEA The fixing control temperature is lowered by 15°C/59°F and forced
stabilization is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat.
Initial setting: ENERGY STAR (for the inch specifications)
GEEA (for the metric specifications)
Completion
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication
Description
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting the
number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.
When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance
count reaches the set value, the message is displayed.
This maintenance mode is effective for only Japanese specification.
U402 Adjusting margins of image printing
Adjustment
See page 1-6-20.
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 1-6-37.
1-4-43
2DA/2DB-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP.
Purpose
Used if margins are not correct when the optional DP is used.
Caution
U402 U403 U404
Method
Setting
Display Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
A MARGIN Left margin 0 to 10.0 2.0 0.1 mm
B MARGIN Leading edge margin 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
C MARGIN Right margin 0 to 10.0 2.0 0.1 mm
D MARGIN Trailing edge margin 0 to 10.0 2.0 0.1 mm
Increasing the setting makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
DP leading edge margin (3 ± 1.5 mm)
Ejection direction
(reference) DP left margin DP right margin
(2 ± 1.0 mm) (2 ± 1.0 mm)
DP trailing edge margin

(2 ± 1.0 mm)
Figure 1-4-6 Correct margin amount

Interrupt copy mode
Completion
displayed.
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Adjustment
See page 1-6-17.
1-4-44
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U504 Initializing the scanner NIC
Description
Initializing the optional scanner NIC to its factory default.
Purpose
To return to a setup at the time of factory shipments.
Method
3. Press the start key. All data in the scanner NIC is initialized.
Completion
U506 Setting the time out
Description
Sets the communication timeout time for connection to a computer.
Purpose
To change the preset value if a communication error occurs after connection to a computer continues for a long
time. By delaying the error detection timing, the error may be cleared. If the error is not cleared after the preset
value is changed, however, return the preset value to the initial value.
Method
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF using the left/right cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
timeout time 10 to 120 (s) 10
The setting can be changed by 10 s per step.
Completion
1-4-45
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
2. Change the screen using the left/right cursor keys.
Display Paper feed locations
BYP Bypass tray
PF1 Drawer
PF2 First paper feeder*2
PF3 Second paper feeder*1
PF4 Third paper feeder*1
DUP Duplex section*1
Clearing
1. Select the count to be cleared using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
However, PF2, 3, and 4 are displayed only and cannot be cleared.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
Completion
maintenance No. item is displayed.
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
Description
Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
Purpose
To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.
Start
3. Press the start key. The code by type is displayed.
Display Description
COUNT Displays/clears the jam counts
TOTAL COUNT Displays the total jam counts
Method: Displays/clears the jam counts

2. Select the counts for all jam codes and select the ALL. Jam counts cannot be cleared individually.
3. Press the start key. The counts are cleared.
Method: Displays the total jam counts
The total number of jam count cannot be cleared.
Completion
1-4-46
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts
Description
Displays or clears the service call code counts by types.
Purpose
To check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing
consumable parts.
Start
3. Press the start key. The code by type is displayed.
Display Description
COUNT Displays/clears the service call code counts
TOTAL COUNT Displays the total service call code counts
Method: Displays/clears the service call code counts

1. Select the code to be cleared using the up/down cursor keys.
Change the screen using the left/right cursor keys. Select the counts for all service call codes and select
the ALL.
Method: Displays the total service call code counts
The total number of service call code count cannot be cleared.
Completion
U905 Checking counts by optional devices
Description
Displays the counts of the optional DP or finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of the DP and finisher.
Method
2. Select the device using the up/down cursor keys, the count of which is to be checked and press the start
key. The count of the selected device is displayed.
• DP
Display Description
ADP No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP in ADP mode
RADP No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP in RADP mode
• Finisher
Display Description
CP CNT No. of copies that has passed
STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated
BUNDLE EJECT Frequency the bundle discharge has been activated
Completion
displayed.
1-4-47
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U906 Resetting partial operation control
Description
Resets the service call code for partial operation control.
Purpose
To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the drawers or other sections, and the
related parts are serviced.
Method
3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control. The maintenance mode is exited, and the machine
returns to the same status as when the power switch is turned on.
U908 Changing the total counter value
Description
Displays the total counter value.
Purpose
To check the total counter value.
Method
Press the start key. The current total counter value is displayed.
Completion
U910 Clearing the black ratio data
Description
Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheets.
Purpose
To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.
Method
3. Press the start key. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item is displayed.
Completion
U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes
Description
Displays and clears the paper feed counts by paper sizes.
Purpose
To check or clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed.
Clearing
1. Select the paper size to be cleared using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in
reverse. To clear all counts, select the ALL.
When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
Completion
maintenance item is displayed.
1-4-48
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U917 Setting backup data reading/writing
Description
Stores backup data from the fax control PCB (when an optional fax kit is installed) into Compact Flash or reads
the data from Compact Flash.
Purpose
To store and write data when replacing the PCB.
Setting
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
3. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine.
4. While pressing the Copier key, turn on the power switch and connect the power plug.
Press and hold on the Copier key until the message “Please wait.” disappears.
5. Enter the maintenance item.
7. Select the item using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
SRAM→CF:BKUP Writing the backup data of fax control PCB
CF→SRAM:BKUP Reading the backup data of fax control PCB
SRAM→CF:DIAL Writing the backup data of fax dial information
CF→SRAM:DIAL Reading the backup data of fax dial information
8. Press the start key. Reading or writing is executed, and the screen displays the result.
• If the operation was successful:

EXECUTE 0100
CHECK SUM ∗∗∗∗
CODE 0000
• If the operation failed:

EXECUTE 0100
CHECK SUM ∗∗∗∗
CODE XXXX
Where XXX is the error code indicating the reason for the failure.
See “Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926” below.
10. Remove the Compact Flash from the machine.
Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926

Code Meaning
0102 Detects call for service on fax control PCB.
0104 Communication error.
0105 Detects call for service on main PCB.
01FF CF error.
0202 No CF card.
0203 No data in CF card.
0204 CF data is incompatible.
0205 Bad CF data (Checksum error)
0206 CF read error.
0207 CF write error.
0212 Fax control PCB flash memory error.
1-4-49
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U920 Checking the accounting counts
Description
Checks the accounting counts.
Purpose
To check the accounting counts.
Method
Press the start key. The current counts of copy counter, printer counter and fax counter are displayed.
Completion
U925 Checking/clearing the system error counts
Description
Displays and clears the count value of system error.
Purpose
To check the system error status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing consumable
parts.
Method
Press the start key. The count for system error detection by type is displayed.
Clearing
2. Select the counts for system error and select the ALL. System error counts cannot be cleared individually.
3. Press the start key. The counts are cleared.
Completion
U926 Rewriting FAX program
Description
Downloads the fax program and fax fonts when installing an optional fax kit.
Purpose
To run when upgrading the fax program and fax fonts.
Setting
3. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the machine.
4. While pressing the Copier key, turn on the power switch and connect the power plug.
Press and hold on the Copier key until the message “Please wait.” disappears.
5. Enter the maintenance item.
Downloading of the fax program starts and the result shown below is displayed.
• If the operation was successful:

EXECUTE 0100
CHECKSUM ∗∗∗∗
CODE 0000

EXECUTE 0100
CODE XXXX
7. Then, downloading of the fax fonts starts and the result shown below is displayed.
1-4-50
2DA/2DB-1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U926 • If the operation was successful:
EXECUTE 0100
CODE 0000
EXECUTE 0100
CODE XXXX
See “Error Codes for Operation U917 and U926” on page 1-4-49.
9. Remove the Compact Flash from the machine.
U927 Clearing the all accounting counts and machine life counts
Description
Clears the all accounting counts and machine life counts.
Purpose
To start the counters with value 0 when installing the machine.
Supplement
The all accounting counts and the machine life counter can be cleared only once only if the count values are
1000 or less.
Method
3. Press the start key. All accounting counts and machine life counts are cleared. If the counts cannot be
cleared, CANNOT EXECUTE is displayed.
Completion
U928 Checking machine life counts
Description
Displays the machine life counts.
Purpose
To check the machine life counts.
Method
Press the start key. The current machine life counts is displayed.
Completion
U941 Setting the default magnification ratio of the default drawer
Description
Sets the default magnification ratio when paper selection of copy default setting is set to the default drawer.
Purpose
Accounting to user request, changes the setting.
Method
Setting
1. Select 100% or AMS using the up/down cursor keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
100% 100 % magnification ratio
AMS Automatical magnification ratio
Initial setting: 100 % magnification ratio
Completion
1-4-51
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U942 Adjusting the DP amount of slack in the original
Description
Adjusts the DP amount of slack in the original.
Purpose
To run this mode if original jams or Z folds occur when copying from the DP.
Method
Setting
CONVEY -10 to +20 0
FEED -10 to +20 0
Increasing the setting, the larger the amount of slack; decreasing the setting, the smaller the amount of
slack.
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light
Description
Displays, clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after
replacement.
Method
Press the start key. The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes.
Clearing
2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a seven-digit accumulated time using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
1-4-52
2DA/2DB
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U991 Checking the scanner count
Description
Displays the scanner operation count.
Purpose
To check the status of use of the scanner.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for the scanner operation count is desplayed.
Display Description
COPY Scanner operation count for copying
FAX Scanner operation count for fax
NWS Network scanner operation count
Completion
U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern
Description
Selects and outputs a VTC-PG pattern created in the machine.
Purpose
When performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that of
the scanner with a non-scanned output VTC-PG pattern.
Method
2. Select the VTC-PG pattern to be output using the up/down cursor keys.
Display PG pattern to be output Purpose
PG1 • Center line adjustment
PG2 • Lateral squareness adjustment

• Magnification adjustment
PG3

4. Press the start key. A VTC-PG pattern is output.
Completion
displayed.
1-4-53
2DA/2DB-1
1-4-2 Management mode
In addition to a maintenance function for service, the machine is equipped with a management function which can be
operated by users (mainly by the machine administrator). In this management mode, settings such as default settings can
be changed.
(1) Using the management mode
Start
Press the system menu/counter key.
Select [Job Accounting] and

then press the enter key.
Enter the Execute job accounting items

management code. (page 1-4-55).
Select [Copy default] and then

press the enter key.
Enter the Make copy default settings

Select [Machine default] and

Enter the Make machine default settings

Select [Bypass setting] and

Make bypass settings

(page 1-4-60).
Select [Counter check] and

Check the counter

(page 1-4-60).
Select [Print report] and then

Output the report (page 1-4-60).
Select [Language] and then Select the [End] and

press the enter key. press the enter key.
Set the language (page 1-4-60).
End
1-4-54
2DA/2DB-1
(2) Setting the job accounting
Registering a new account Job accounting ON/OFF

Registers ID-codes and the limit of use for each 1. Select [Job Accounting On/Off] and then
account. press the enter key.
1. Select [Edit Job Accounting] and then press 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter
the enter key. key.
2. Select [New registration] and then press the
enter key. Copier job accounting ON/OFF
3. Enter the ID-code (up to 8 digits) using the
1. Select [Job Accounting Def. Set.] and then
numeric keys.
4. Press the enter key.
2. Select [Copy Job Account.] and then press
5. Set the lmit of use.
the enter key.
6. Select [End] and then press the enter key.
3. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter
key.
Deleting an account
1. Select [Edit Job Accounting] and then press Printer job accounting ON/OFF
the enter key.
2. Select [Delete] and then press the enter key.
3. Select the ID-code to delete and then press
2. Select [Prnt Job Account.] and then press the
the enter key.
enter key.
4. Select [Yes] or [No] and then press the enter
key.
key.
Changing limit of use
Scanner job accounting ON/OFF
1. Select [Edit Job Accounting] and then press
Note: This setting is only available when the
the enter key.
optional network scanner board is installed in the
2. Select [Change limit in use] and then press
machine.
the enter key.
3. Select the ID-code to change and then press
the enter key.
2. Select [Scanner Job Accnt] and then press
4. Change the limit of use.
the enter key.
key.
All account management
You can browse the total output count, output the Fax job accounting ON/OFF
job accounting report, and clear the counter for all
Note: This setting is only available when the
accounts.
optional fax kit is installed in the machine.
1. Select [Job Accounting Total] and then press
the enter key.
2. Select [Print report] and then press the enter
2. Select [Fax Job Accountng] and then press
key. The management report is printed out.
the enter key.
3. Select [Counter clear] and then press the
enter key.
key.
key.
Operation against excess over limit
Individual account management Determines whether to stop output by prohibiting
immediately use of the machine, to stop the
Checks the output count and/or clears the
operation from the next job or to display a
counter for individual accounts.
warning message onle, when the limit of count
1. Select [Each Job Accouning TL] and then
that has been set with the function of the limit of
press the enter key. The output counts of
use is exceeded.
individual accounts are displayed.
2. Select the ID-code to clear and then press
the enter key.
2. Select [Excess limit Set.] and then press the
enter key.
key.
3. Select [Stop job immediately], [Stop after job
done] or [Only warning]and then press the
enter key.
1-4-55
2DA/2DB-1
(3) Copy default Default drawer
Exposure mode Sets one drawer that will be selected

automatically regardless of the size of paper
Selects the exposure mode at power-on. loaded in that drawer.
1. Select [Exposure Mode] and then press the 1. Select [Default cassette] and then press the
enter key. entrer key.
2. Select [Manual] or [Auto] and then press the 2. Select the drawer that will be used with
enter key. priority.
Settings: Cassette 1/Cassette 2/Cassette 3/
Original quality Cassette 4
Selects the image quality at power-on. * For 16 ppm model, the setting for drawer 2,
1. Select [Orig Quality] and then press the enter 3 and 4 will only be available when the
key. optional paper feeder is installed.
2. Select [Text+Photo], [Photo] or [Text] and * For 20 ppm model, the setting for drawer 3
then press the enter key. and 4 will only be available when the
optional paper feeder is installed.
Eco print mode ON/OFF
Default magnification ratio
Determines whether or not the eco print mode will
be the default setting in the initial mode. Sets whether or not the appropriate magnification
1. Select [EcoPrint] and then press the enter ratio to be calculated automatically when
key. selecting the size of copy paper.
2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter 1. Select [Default magnif.] and then press the
key. enter key.
2. Select [100%] or [Auto %] and then press the
Background color adjustment enter key.
Adjust the ground color of the copied paper. Auto exposure adjustment
1. Select [Background adjst] and then press the
enter key. Adjusts the overall exposure level for the auto
2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter exposure mode.
key. 1. Select [Adj.Auto expos.] and then press the
Setting range: 1 to 5 enter key.
2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter
Paper selection key.
Setting range: 1 to 7
Sets whether the copier will automatically select
the same size of copy paper as the original once Auto exposure adjustment (OCR)
an original is set, or whether the designated
default drawer will be automatically selected. Adjusts the overall exposure level for scanning
1. Select [Paper Select] and then press the with OCR (Optical Character Recognition)
enter key. software when using the optional scanner
2. Select [Auto] or [Default cassette] and then functions of this machine.
press the enter key. 1. Select [Auto expos.(OCR)] and then press
the enter key.
Paper type (Auto paper selection mode) 2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter
key.
Selects the types of paper that will be available Setting range: 1 to 7
for selection under the APS (Auto Paper
Selection) mode. Manual exposure adjustment (text+photo mode)
1. Select [Paper type(Auto)] and then press the
enter key. Adjusts the median exposure value when the
2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter text+photo mode is selected for the image quality.
key. 1. Select [Txt+Photo Dens.] and then press the
3. If selected [On], select the desired paper type enter key.
and then press the enter key. 2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter
key.
1-4-56
2DA/2DB-1
Manual exposure adjustment (text mode) Erased border width

Adjusts the median exposure value when the text Determines the default value for the width of the
mode is selected for the image quality. border to be erased in the two border erase
1. Select [Txt Ori Density] and then press the modes.
enter key. 1. Select [BorderEraseWidth] and then press
2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter the enter key.
key. 2. Sets the widths and then press the enter key.
Setting range: 1 to 7 Setting range:
1/8" to 3/4" in 1/8" increments (inch
Manual exposure adjustment (photo mode) specifications)

1 to 18 mm in 1mm increments (metric
Adjusts the median exposure value when the
specifications)
photo mode is selected for the image quality.
1. Select [Photo Ori Dnsity] and then press the
Copy limit
enter key.
2. Adjust the exposure and then press the enter Sets the limit for the number of copies (or copy
key. sets) that can be made at a time.
Setting range: 1 to 7 1. Select [Copy Limit] and then press the enter
key.
Sort mode ON/OFF 2. Sets the copy limit and then press the enter
key.
Determines whether or not the Sort mode will be
the default setting in the initial mode.
1. Select [Sort] and then press the enter key.
Black-line correction
key. Reduces black lines that may be caused when
the DP is used.
Offset copying 1. Select [Corr. Black line] and then press the
enter key.
Determines whether or not the offset copy will be
2. Select [None], [Weak] or [Strong] and then
the default setting in the initial mode.
1. Select [Offset] and then press the enter key.
key.
Auto Rotation mode ON/OFF

Determines whether or not the Auto Rotation
mode will be the default setting in the initial
mode.
1. Select [Auto Rotation] and then press the
enter key.
key.
Margin width
Determines the default value of the location and
width of the margins in the margin mode.
1. Select [Margin Width] and then press the
enter key.
2. Sets the margin widths and then press the
enter key.
Setting range:
1/8" to 3/4" in 1/8" increments (inch
specifications)
1 to 18 mm in 1mm increments (metric
specifications)
1-4-57
2DA/2DB-1
(4) Machine default Duplex print for paper type
Auto drawer switching ON/OFF Sets whether or not each custom type of paper
(custom 1 to custom 8) will be available for use in
Turns automatic drawer switching ON or OFF. duplex printing.
1. Select [Auto Cassette SW] and then press 1. Select [P. type (Duplex)] and then press the
the enter key. enter key.
2. Select [On/All types of paper], [On/Only same 2. Select one of the [Custom 1 to 8] and then
paper type] or [Off] and then press the enter press the enter key.
key. 3. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter
key.
Paper size (drawer 1 to 4)
Sets the size of paper that is loaded in drawer 1 Custom paper type
through 4. Sets whether or not to match the orientation in
1. Select one of the [Paper Size (1st) to (4th)] one-sided printing and two-sided printing.
and then press the enter key. 1. Select [Special P. type] and then press the
2. Select [Auto Detection Metric], [Auto enter key.
Detection Inch] or a paper size and then 2. Select [Match Print Direction] or [Fast Mode]
press the enter key. and then press the enter key.
* For 16 ppm model, the setting for drawer 2,
3 and 4 will only be available when the Original orientation
* For 20 ppm model, the setting for drawer 3 Sets the default original orientation.
and 4 will only be available when the 1. Select [Orig. direction] and then press the
optional paper feeder is installed. enter key.
2. Select [Rear] or [Left top] and then press the
Paper type (drawer 1 to 4) enter key.
Sets the type of paper that is loaded in drawers 1 Auto sleep time
through 4.
1. Select one of the [Paper Type (1st) to (4th)] Sets the time that elapses before the auto sleep
and then press the enter key. function.
2. Select the paper type and then press the 1. Select [Sleep mode time] and then press the
enter key. enter key.
* For 16 ppm model, the setting for drawer 2, 2. Sets sleep mode type and then press the
3 and 4 will only be available when the enter key.
optional paper feeder is installed. Setting range:
* For 20 ppm model, the setting for drawer 3 1 to 240 min (Inch specifications)
and 4 will only be available when the 1 to 120 mim (metric specifications)
Auto low power time
Bypass tray settings display ON/OFF Sets the time that elapses before the low power
1. Select one of the [Check Bypass] and then mode is automatically activated.
press the enter key. 1. Select [Low power time] and then press the
2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter enter key.
key. 2. Sets low power time and then press the
enter key.
Paper weight for paper type Setting range:
1 to 240 mm (Inch specifications)
Sets the paper weight for each paper type. 1 to 120 mm (metric specifications)
1. Select [P. type (Weight)] and then press the
enter key. Copy eject location
2. Select paper type and then press the enter
key. Sets the paper output location with priority for
3. Select paper weight and then press the enter copying.
key. This setting is only available when the optional
finisher or job separator are installed in the
machine.
1. Select [Copy Otput Destn] and then press the
enter key.
2. Select output location and then press the
enter key.
1-4-58
2DA/2DB-1
Fax eject location Auto sleep ON/OFF

Sets where incoming faxes will be ejected. Sets whether or not to have the auto sleep
This setting is only available when the optional function.
fax kit, finisher or job separator are installed in This setting is displayed only on the inch
the machine. specification model.
1. Select [Fax Output Destn] and then press the 1. Select [Auto Sleep] and then press the enter
enter key. key.
2. Select output location and then press the 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter
enter key. key.
Default operation mode Auto clear ON/OFF

Sets whether the display that appears after power Sets whether or not to have the auto clear
is turned on to the machine will be the one for the function.
copy operation mode or for the fax operation 1. Select [Auto Clear] and then press the enter
mode. key.
This setting is only available when the optional 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter
fax kit is installed. key.
1. Select [Main mode] and then press the enter
key. Auto clear time
2. Select [Copy mode] or [Fax mode] and then
Sets the time that elapses from completion of
copying to activation of the auto cler function.
1. Select [Auto Clear Time] and then press the
Key sound ON/OFF
enter key.
Sets whether or not the operation panel will emit 2. Sets the time and then press the enter key.
a beep sound each time a key is pressed. Setting range: 10 to 270 s
1. Select [Key sound On/Off] and then press the
enter key. Silent mode ON/OFF
Sets whether or not to use the silent mode which
key.
shortens the length of time that the laser data
writing motor continues to spin after each copy
Day and time
job is finished.
Sets the current date and time. 1. Select [Silent Mode] and then press the enter
1. Select [Date/Time] and then press the enter key.
key. 2. Select [On] or [Off] and then press the enter
2. Sets the current date and time. key.
Display contrast adjustment

Adjust the display contrast.
1. Select [Display Contrast] and then press the
enter key.
2. Adjust the contrast and then press the enter
key.
Changing the management code

Changes the management code.
1. Select [PIN # Change] and then press the
enter key.
2. Enter a new 4-digit management code using
the numeric keys.
1-4-59
2DA/2DB-1
(5) Bypass setting (6) Checking the total counter and printing out the
counter report
Paper size and type
Checks the total count of copies, etc., and prints
Sets the paper size and paper type for the
out the information as a counter report.
bypass settings.
1. Select [Counter check] and then press the
When using special papers such as transparency,
enter key.
cards, and postcards, be sure to set the paper
2. Select [Output count] or [Scan count] and
type to prevent faulty transfer and faulty fixing.
1. Select paper size.
If the paper size is unknown or no particular
4. Select [Print counter report] and then press
paper size setting is required, select
the enter key to print out a counter report.
[Universal Size].
When setting a size, turn on the size input
and use the left/right cursor key to select the
(7) Status report print out
paper size.
Setting range:
Prints out one of the status report.
(Inch specifications)
1. Select [Print Report] and then press the enter
Width: 3 7/8" to 11 5/8"
key.
Length: 5 7/8" to 17"
2. Select the report to print out and then press
(Metric specifications)
the enter key.
Width: 98 to 297 mm
[Copy report]
Length: 148 to 432 mm
[Machine report]
2. Press the enter key.
[Coverage report]
3. Select paper type and then press the enter
The selected status report will be printed out.
key.
Selecting other standard sizes

(8) Language selection function
Sets a special standard size.
1. Select [Other Regular Size] and then press Switches the language to be displayed on the
the enter key. operation panel.
2. Select paper size and then press the enter 1. Select [Language] and then press the enter
key. key.
3. Select paper type and then press the enter 2. Select the language to use and then press
key. the enter key.
Available languages:
Inch specifications
Japanese, English, French and Spanish
Metric specifications
English, German, French, Spanish and Italian
1-4-60
2DA/2DB
1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection
(1) Paper misfeed indication

When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops operating and displays the jam location on the operation panel.
Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903.
To remove paper jammed in the machine, open the front cover, left cover, or pull the drawer out.
To remove original jammed in the DP, open the DP original cover.
Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on.
6
5
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
Figure 1-5-1
1 Misfeed in the drawer 1

2 Misfeed in the drawer 2*2
5 Misfeed in the bypass tray
6 Misfeed in the paper conveying section
7 Misfeed in the exit section
(Misfeed in the job separator*1 or finisher*1)
8 Misfeed in the DP*1
*1: Optional.
*2: Optional for 16 ppm model.
Standard for 20 ppm model.
1-5-1
2DA/2DB
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
OCM OFM
OSBSW
DPTSW
PCSW
ESW
FSSW
DUPPCSW
DUPFCL RM
RSW
BYPPFSOL
PFCL
DPFCL1
DFSW1
DPFCL2
DFSW2
DPFCL3
Figure 1-5-2
1-5-2
2DA/2DB
Section Jam code Description Conditions

System 00 No paper feed When the power switch is turned on, the machine detects
activation of the registration switch (RSW), the exit switch
(ESW) or the feedshift switch (FSSW).
04 Cover open JAM A cover open state is detected during copying.
05 Secondary paper feed When the machine waits for secondary paper feed, 30 s or
timeout more have elapsed.
Paper feed 10 No paper feed from the The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1680
section bypass tray ms of the bypass paper feed solenoid (BYPPFSOL) turning
on; the solenoid is then successively held off for 1 s and
turned back on once, but the switch again fails to turn on
within 1680 ms.
11 No paper feed from the The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1430
drawer 1 (drawer) ms of the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turning on; the clutch is
then successively held off for 1 s and turned back on once,
but the switch again fails to turn on within 1430 ms.
12 No paper feed from the The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 2780
drawer 2*2 (first paper ms of the drawer paper feed clutch 1 (DPFCL1)*2 turning on;
feeder) the clutch is then successively held off for 1 s and turned
back on once, but the switch again fails to turn on within
2780 ms.
13 No paper feed from the The drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 does not turn on within
drawer 3*1 (second paper 2490 ms of the drawer paper feed clutch 2 (DPFCL2)*1 turn-
feeder) ing on; the clutch is then successively held off for 1 s and
within 2490 ms.
14 No paper feed from the The drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 does not turn on within
drawer 4*1 (third paper 2490 ms of the drawer paper feed clutch 3 (DPFCL3)*1 turn-
feeder) ing on; the clutch is then successively held off for 1 s and
within 2490 ms.
15 Misfeed in vertical paper The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 2340
conveying 1 ms of drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 turning on.
The drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 does not turn off within
2050 ms of drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 turning on.
The drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 does not turn off within
2050 ms of drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 turning off.
16 Misfeed in vertical paper The drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 does not turn on within
conveying 2 2050 ms of drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 turning on.
Paper con- 20 Multiple sheets in the by- The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 6320
veying pass tray ms of registration switch (RSW) turning on.
section
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1680
ms of bypass paper feed solenoid (BYPPFSOL) turning on.
21 Multiple sheets in the The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 6320
drawer 1 (drawer) ms of registration switch (RSW) turning on.
ms of paper feed clutch (PFCL) turning on.
1-5-3
2DA/2DB

Paper con- 22 Multiple sheets in the The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 6320
veying drawer 2*2 (first paper ms of registration switch (RSW) turning on.
section feeder)
ms of drawer paper feed clutch 1 (DPFCL1)*2 turning on.
23 Multiple sheets in the The drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 does not turn off within
drawer 3*1 (second paper 6320 ms of drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 turning on.
feeder)
The rdrawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)* 2 does not turn off within
2490 ms of drawer paper feed clutch 2 (DPFCL2)* 1 turning on.
24 Multiple sheets in the The drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 does not turn off within
drawer 4*1 (third paper 6320 ms of drawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)*1 turning on.
feeder)
The rdrawer feed switch 2 (DFSW2)* 1 does not turn off within
2490 ms of drawer paper feed clutch 3 (DPFCL3)* 1 turning on.
Transfer 30 Misfeed in registration/ The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 2340
section transfer section ms of drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 turning on.
ms of drawer feed switch 1 (DFSW1)*2 turning off.
ms of duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW1)*1 turning
on.
Fixing sec- 40 Misfeed in the fixing sec- The exit switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3020 ms of the
tion tion (paper feed from by- registration motor (RM) turning on.
pass tray)
41 Misfeed in the fixing sec- The exit switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3020 ms of the
tion (paper feed from registration motor (RM) turning on.
drawer)
tion (paper feed from first registration motor (RM) turning on.
paper feeder*2)
second paper feeder*1)
third paper feeder*1)
tion (paper feed from du- registration motor (RM) turning on.
plex section*1)
Exit sec- 50 Misfeed in the exit sec- The exit switch (ESW) does not turn off within 3020 ms of the
tion tion registration switch (RSW) turning off.
The exit switch (ESW) does not turn on within 3020 ms of the
registration motor (RM) turning on.
51 Misfeed in the job sepa- The job separator eject switch (JBESW)*1 does not turn on
rator*1 within 2050 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.
The job separator eject switch (JBESW)*1 does not turn off
within 2050 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off.
The job separator eject switch (JBESW)*1 does not turn off
within 2050 ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off.
1-5-4
2DA/2DB

Feedshift 52 Misfeed in the feedshift The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 6320
section section (paper feed from ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.
bypass tray)
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 1530
ms of paper switchback.
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 1530

53 Misfeed in the feedshift The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 6320
section (paper feed from ms of feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.
drawer)

first paper feeder*2)

second paper feeder*1)

third paper feeder*1)

duplex section*1)

Duplex 60 Misfeed in duplex paper The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*1 does not
section conveying section*1 turn off within 3280 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turn-
ing on.
The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*1 does not

turn on within 3280 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turn-
ing on.
The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*1 does not

turn off within 3280 ms of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turn-
ing off.
1-5-5
2DA/2DB

Duplex 61 Misfeed in duplex exit The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1760
section section*1 ms of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*1
turning on.
ms of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)*1
turning off.
DP 70 No original feed*1 During the primary feed of the second original in the single-
sided or double-sided original mode, even if retry operation is
performed five times, primary original feed is not performed.
71 An original jam in the During the secondary original feed in the single-sided or
original conveying sec- double-sided original mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW)*1
tion 1*1 does not turn off within 6500 ms of the original conveying
motor (OCM)*1 turning on.
72 An original size error During the secondary original feed in the single-sided or
jam*1 double-sided original mode, the DP timing switch (DPTSW)*1
does turn off within 750 ms of the original conveying motor
(OCM)*1 turning on.
73 An original jam in the During scanning of the second side or reversing of the origi-
original conveying sec- nal for ejection in the double-sided original mode, the DP tim-
tion 2*1 ing switch (DPTSW)*1 does not turn off within 6500 ms of the
original conveying motor (OCM)*1 turning on.
74 An original jam in the During scanning of the second side or reversing of the origi-
original conveying sec- nal for ejection in the double-sided original mode, the DP tim-
tion 3*1 ing switch (DPTSW)*1 does not turn on within 750 ms of the
original conveying motor (OCM)*1 turning on.
75 An original jam in the During the switchback operation of an original in the double-
original switchback sec- sided original mode, the original switchback switch (OSBSW)
tion*1 *1 does not turn on within 1300 ms of the original conveying
motor (OCM)*1 turning on.
Finisher 80 Jam between the finisher The paper conveying switch (PCSW)*1 does not turn on
and MFP*1 within 1550 ms of the signal requesting paper ejection is out-
put from the MFP.
81 Intake jam*1 During paper intake from the MFP, the paper conveying
switch (PCSW)*1 does not turn off within 1960 to 3480 ms
(depending on paper size) of paper conveying switch
(PCSW)*1 turning on.
83 Jam during paper con- When ejection a stack of paper, the paper conveying switch
veying for batch ejection (PCSW)*1 does not turn on within 1590 ms of the paper con-
1*1 veying motor (PCM)*1 turning on.
84 Jam during paper con- When ejection a stack of paper, the paper conveying switch
veying for batch ejection (PCSW)*1 does not turn off within 2260 to 3190 ms (varies
2*1 depending on the paper size) of the paper conveying motor
(PCM)*1 turning on.
1-5-6
2DA/2DB
(3) Paper misfeeds
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(1) A piece of paper torn from Check visually and remove it, if any.
A paper jam in the copy paper is caught
paper feed, paper around registration switch,
conveying or exit exit sensor or feedshift
section is indicated switch.
as soon as the
Defective registration Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and
power switch is
switch. off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the cor-
turned on.
responding switch is not light.
Jam code 00
Defective exit switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn exit switch on and off
manually. Replace exit switch if indication of the corresponding
switch is not light.
Defective feedshift switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feedshift switch on and off
manually. Replace feedshift switch if indication of the corre-
sponding switch is not light.
(2) Paper on the bypass tray Change the paper.

A paper jam in the is extremely curled.
paper feed section
Check if the bypass paper Check visually and replace any deformed pulley.
is indicated during
feed pulley is deformed.
copying (no paper
feed from the by- Broken registration switch Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is
pass tray). actuator. broken.
Jam code 10
Check if the bypass paper Run maintenance item U032 and select the bypass paper feed
feed solenoid malfunc- solenoid to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if
tions. necessary.
Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-5-35).

bypass paper feed sole-
noid.
(3) Paper in the drawer is ex- Change the paper.

A paper jam in the tremely curled.
paper feed section
Check if the paper feed Check visually and replace any deformed pulley.
is indicated during
pulley, separation pulley or
copying (no paper
forward pulley is de-
feed from the
formed.
drawer 1).
Jam code 11 Broken registration switch Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is
actuator. broken.
Check if the paper feed Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch to
clutch malfunctions. be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.

paper feed clutch.
1-5-7
2DA/2DB

(4) Paper in the first paper Change the paper.
A paper jam in the feeder*2 is extremely
paper feed section curled.
is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from the
forward pulley in the first
drawer 2).
paper feeder*2 is de-
Jam code 12
formed.
Broken registration switch Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is
actuator. broken.
Check if the drawer paper Run maintenance item U032 and select the drawer paper feed
feed clutch 1*2 malfunc- clutch 1 to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if
tions. necessary.
Electrical problem with the Check.

drawer paper feed clutch
1*2.
(5) Paper in the second paper Change the paper.

is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from the
forward pulley in the sec-
drawer 3).
ond paper feeder*1 is de-
Jam code 13
formed.
Broken drawer feed switch Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 1 if its actuator is
1*2 actuator. broken.
Defective drawer feed Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 1 on
switch 1*2. and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 1 if indication of
the corresponding switch is not light.
tions. necessary.

2*1.
(6) Paper in the third paper Change the paper.

is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from the
forward pulley in the third
drawer 4).
paper feeder*1 is de-
Jam code 14
formed.
1-5-8
2DA/2DB

(6) Defective drawer feed Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 2 on
A paper jam in the switch 2*1. and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 2 if indication of
paper feed section the corresponding switch is not light.
is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from the
tions. necessary.
drawer 4).
Jam code 14 Electrical problem with the Check.
3*1.
(7) Broken registration switch Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is
A paper jam in the actuator. broken.
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (misfeed in
vertical paper con-
veying 1). Broken drawer feed switch Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 1 if its actuator is
Jam code 15 1*2 actuator. broken.

paper feed clutch.
tions. necessary.

1*2.
tions. necessary.

2*1.
tions. necessary.

3*1.
1-5-9
2DA/2DB

(8) Broken drawer feed switch Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 1 if its actuator is
A paper jam in the 1*2 actuator. broken.
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (misfeed in
vertical paper con-
veying 2). Broken drawer feed switch Check visually and replace drawer feed switch 2 if its actuator is
Jam code 16 2*1 actuator. broken.
tions. necessary.

1*2.
tions. necessary.

2*1.
(9) Deformed guides along Repair or replace if necessary.

A paper jam in the the paper conveying path.
paper conveying
section is indicated
actuator. broken.
during copying (mul-
tiple sheets in the Defective registration Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and
bypass tray). switch. off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the cor-
Jam code 20 responding switch is not light.
Check if the bypass paper Run maintenance item U032 and select the bypass paper feed
feed solenoid malfunc- solenoid to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if
tions. necessary.

bypass paper feed sole-
noid.
Check if the right and left Check visually and remedy if necessary.
registration rollers contact
each other.

paper conveying
actuator. broken.
drawer 1). switch. off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the cor-
1-5-10
2DA/2DB

(10) Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-5-35).
A paper jam in the paper feed clutch.
paper conveying
section is indicated Check if the right and left Check visually and remedy if necessary.
during copying (mul- registration rollers contact
tiple sheets in the each other.
drawer 1).
Jam code 21

paper conveying
actuator. broken.
drawer 2). switch. off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the cor-
tions. necessary.

1*2.
Check if the right and left Check visually and remedy if necessary.
registration rollers contact
each other.
paper conveying
tiple sheets in the Defective drawer feed Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 1 on
drawer 3). switch 1*2. and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 1 if indication of
Jam code 23 the corresponding switch is not light.
tions. necessary.

2*1.
paper conveying
tiple sheets in the Defective drawer feed Run maintenance item U031 and turn drawer feed switch 2 on
drawer 4). switch 2*1. and off manually. Replace drawer feed switch 2 if indication of
Jam code 24 the corresponding switch is not light.
tions. necessary.

3*1.
1-5-11
2DA/2DB

transfer section is
indicated during
actuator. broken.
copying (misfeed in
registration/transfer Defective registration Run maintenance item U031 and turn registration switch on and
section). switch. off manually. Replace registration switch if indication of the cor-
Broken duplex paper con- Check visually and replace the duplex paper conveying switch if
veying switch*1 actuator. its actuator is broken.
Defective duplex paper Run maintenance item U031 and turn duplex paper conveying
conveying switch*1. switch on and off manually. Replace duplex paper conveying
switch if indication of the corresponding switch is not light.
(15) Check if the fixing unit Repair or replace if necessary.

A paper jam in the front guide is deformed.
fixing section is indi-
Check if the press roller is Clean or replace if necessary.
cated during copy-
extremely dirty or de-
ing (misfeed in the
formed.
fixing section).
Jam code 40, 41, Check if the heat roller Clean or replace if necessary.
42, 43, 44, 45 separation claws are dirty
or deformed.
Check if the heat roller and Remedy if the separation claw springs are out of place.
its separation claws con-
tact each other.
Broken exit switch actua- Check visually and replace the exit switch if its actuator is bro-
tor. ken.
Check if the registration Run maintenance item U030 and select the registration motor to
motor malfunctions. be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.

registration motor.
(16) Broken registration switch Check visually and replace registration switch if its actuator is
exit section is indi-
cated during copy-
ing (misfeed in the
exit section).
Jam code 50 Broken exit switch actua- Check visually and replace the exit switch if its actuator is bro-
tor. ken.
1-5-12
2DA/2DB

(16) Check if the registration Run maintenance item U030 and select the registration motor to
A paper jam in the motor malfunctions. be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.
cated during copy-
registration motor.
ing (misfeed in the
exit section).
Jam code 50
(17) Broken feedshift switch Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator is
cated during copy-
ing (misfeed in the
job separator).
Jam code 51 Broken Job separator eject Check visually and replace the Job separator eject switch if its
switch*1 actuator. actuator is broken.
Defective Job separator Run maintenance item U031 and turn Job separator eject switch
eject switch*1. on and off manually. Replace Job separator eject switch if indi-
cation of the corresponding switch is not light.
feedshift section is
indicated during
copying (misfeed in
the feedshift sec-
tion). Check if the exit motor Run maintenance item U030 and select the exit motor to be
Jam code 52, 53, malfunctions. turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.
54, 55, 56, 57
exit motor.
duplex section is
indicated during
copying (misfeed in
duplex paper con-
veying section). Broken duplex paper con- Check visually and replace the duplex paper conveying switch if
Jam code 60 veying switch*1 actuator. its actuator is broken.
Check if the exit motor Run maintenance item U030 and select the exit motor to be
malfunctions. turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if necessary.

exit motor.
Check if the duplex feed Check visually and remedy if necessary.

clutch*1 malfunctions.

duplex feed clutch*1.
1-5-13
2DA/2DB

(20) Broken duplex paper con- Check visually and replace the duplex paper conveying switch if
A paper jam in the veying switch*1 actuator. its actuator is broken.
duplex section is
indicated during
copying (misfeed in
duplex paper con-
veying section). Broken registration switch Check visually and replace the registration switch if its actuator
Jam code 61 actuator. is broken.
Check if the duplex feed Check visually and remedy if necessary.

clutch*1 malfunctions.

duplex feed clutch*1.
(21) A piece of paper torn from Check visually and remove it, if any.
An original jams an original is caught
when the power around the DP timing
switch is turned on. switch*1 or original
switchback switch*1.
Defective DP timing Run maintenance item U244 and turn DP timing switch on and
switch*1. off manually. Replace DP timing switch if indication of the corre-
Defective original Run maintenance item U244 and turn original switchback switch
switchback switch*1. on and off manually. Replace original switchback switch if indi-
cation of the corresponding switch is not light.
(22) Defective original set Run maintenance item U244 and turn original set switch on and
An original jams in switch*1. off manually. Replace original set switch if indication of the cor-
the original feed responding switch is not light.
Check if the original feed Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor
during copying (no
motor*1 malfunctions. to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if neces-
original feed).
sary.
Jam code 70
Check if the DP paper Check visually and replace the deformed pulley.
feed pulley or DP separa-
tion pad is deformed.
(23) Broken DP timing switch*1 Check visually and replace DP timing switch if its actuator is bro-
An original jams in actuator. ken.
the original convey-
ing section is indi-
cated during copy-
ing (An original jam
in the original con- Check if the original con- Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying
veying section 1). veying motor*1 malfunc- motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if
Jam code 71 tions. necessary.
1-5-14
2DA/2DB

cated during copy-
ing (An original size
error jam). Check if the original con- Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying
Jam code 72 veying motor*1 malfunc- motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if
tions. necessary.
cated during copy-
Check if the switchback Run maintenance item U243 and select the switchback feedshift
feedshift solenoid*1 mal- solenoid to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if
functions. necessary.
cated during copy-
Check if the switchback Run maintenance item U243 and select the switchback feedshift
feedshift solenoid malfunc- solenoid to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if
tions*1. necessary.
(27) Defective original Run maintenance item U244 and turn original switchback switch
An original jams in switchback switch*1. on and off manually. Replace original switchback switch if indi-
the original cation of the corresponding switch is not light.
switchback section
Check if the original con- Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveying
is indicated during
veying motor*1 malfunc- motor to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if
copying (An original
tions. necessary.
jam in the original
switchback section). Check if the switchback Run maintenance item U243 and select the switchback feedshift
Jam code 75 feedshift solenoid*1 mal- solenoid to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy if
functions. necessary.
(28) An original outside the Use only originals conforming to the specifications.
Original jams fre- specifications is used.
quently.
The DP forwarding pulley Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
or DP paper feed pulley is
dirty with paper powder.
The DP paper feed pulley Check and remedy.

and DP separation pad do
not contact correctly.
1-5-15
2DA/2DB

(29) Defective paper conveying With 5 V DC present at CN4-9 on the finisher main PCB, check
A paper jam in the switch*1. if CN4-10 on the finisher main PCB remains high or low when
finisher*1 is indi- the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does, re-
cated during copy- place the paper conveying switch.
ing (Intake jam).
Check if the feedshift roller Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed.
Jam code 81
or feedshift pulley is de-
formed.
ing (jam during pa-
Check if the feedshift roller Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed.
per conveying for
or press roller is deformed.
batch ejection 1).
Jam code 83
ing (jam during pa-
Check if the eject roller or Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed.
per conveying for
eject pulley is deformed.
batch ejection 2).
Jam code 84
1-5-16
2DA/2DB
1-5-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled. "C" and a number
between 0030 and 8210 altenates, indicating the nature of the problem.
A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by power switch turns off and on.
• List of system errors

When an unexpected error is detected for some reason, a system error will be indicated. After a system error is indicated,
the error can be cleared by turning the main switch off and then on. If the error is detected continuously, however, perform
the operation shown in Table 1-5-1. If a system error occurs frequently, a fault may have occurred. Check the details of the
C call to take proper measures.
System error Contens Operation
0210 Communication problem between the main System error → Normal C call processing
PCB and engine PCB
0250 Scanner network board*1 communication System error → Normal C call processing
problem
0410 DP*1 communication problem System error → Normal C call processing
0420 First paper feeder*2 communication problem System error → Normal C call processing
0440 Finisher*1 communication problem System error
0500 Second paper feeder*1 communication System error → Normal C call processing
problem
0510 Third paper feeder*1 communication problem System error → Normal C call processing
0630 DMA problem System error → Normal C call processing
3100 Scanner carriage problem System error → Normal C call processing

Table 1-5-1 List of system errors
• Partial operation control

If any of the following calls for service is detected, partial operation control will be activated. After taking measures against
the cause of trouble, run maintenance item U906 to reset partial operation control.
Display Contens
C8170 Finisher*1 front side registration motor problem
C8180 Finisher*1 rear side registration motor problem
C8190 Finisher*1 trailing edge registration motor problem
C8210 Finisher*1 front stapler problem
*1: Optional.
1-5-17
2DA/2DB
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0030 Fax control PCB*1 system problem Defective fax con- Replace the fax control PCB and check for
• Processing with the fax software was trol PCB. correct operation.
disabled due to a hardware or soft-
ware problem.
C0070 Fax control PCB*1 incompatibility Fax software or Check the version of the Fax software and
detection problem main software is the main software, upgrade the version to
• Fax software is not compatible with something of the the compatible software.
MMI software. other machine.
C0100 Backup memory read/write problem Defectivemain Replace the main PCB and check for cor-
(main PCB flash) PCB. rect operation.
• Read and write data does not match.
C0110 Backup memory data problem (main Problem with the Turn safety switch off and back on and run
PCB flash) backup memory maintenance item U020 to set the contents
• Data in the specified area of the data. of the backup memory data again.
backup memory does not match the
Defective backup If the C0110 is displayed after re-setting
specified values.
RAM. the backup memory contents, replace the
main PCB.
C0130 Backup memory read/write problem Defective Replace the main PCB and check for cor-
(main PCB EEPROM) EEPROM or main rect operation.
• Read and write data does not match. PCB.
C0140 Backup memory data problem (main Problem with the Turn safety switch off and back on and run
PCB EEPROM) backup memory maintenance item U020 to set the contents
Defective If the C0140 is displayed after re-setting
specified values.
EEPROM. the backup memory contents, replace the
EEPROM or main PCB.
C0150 Backup memory read/write problem Defective engine Replace the engine PCB and check for
(engine PCB) PCB. correct operation.
• Read and write data does not match.
C0160 Backup memory data problem (en- Problem with the Turn safety switch off and back on and run
gine PCB) backup memory maintenance item U020 to set the contents
Defective backup If the C0160 is displayed after re-setting
specified values.
RAM. the backup memory contents, replace the
engine PCB.
C0170 Accounting count problem Defective main Replace the main PCB or engine PCB and
• When the power is turned on, the to- PCB or engine check for correct operation.
tal count and the scan count are ab- PCB.
normal both on the main PCB and the
engine PCB.
C0180 Machine number mismatch Correct EEPROM Install the correct EEPROM. If it does not
• When the power is turned on, the ma- is not installed. solve the problem, contact the Service Ad-
chine number does not match be- ministrative Division.
tween the main PCB and the engine
Data damage of Contact the Service Administrative Divi-
PCB.
EEPROM. sion.
1-5-18
2DA/2DB
Remarks
Code Contents
C0210 Communication problem between Poor contact in Check the connection of connector. Repair
the main PCB and engine PCB the connector ter- or replace if necessary.
• When the power is turned on, the ma- minals.
chine does not detect the low level of
Defective main Replace the main PCB or engine PCB and
SBSY and the high level of SDIR for
PCB or engine check for correct operation.
10 s.
PCB.
C0240 Printer board PCB communication Poor contact in Check the connection of connector. Repair
problem the connector ter- or replace if necessary.
• The printer board PCB does not re- minals.
spond 120 s after the power is turned
Defective main Replace the main PCB or printer board
on.
PCB or printer PCB and check for correct operation.
board PCB.
C0250 Scanner network board*1 communi- Poor contact in Check the connection of connector. Repair
cation problem the connector ter- or replace if necessary.
• The scanner network board does not minals.
respond.
Defective main Replace the main PCB or scanner network
PCB or scanner board and check for correct operation.
network board.
C0280 Fax control PCB*1 communication Poor contact in Check the connection of connector. Repair
problem the connector ter- or replace if necessary.
• Communication between the fax con- minals.
trol PCB and the main PCB of the
Defective main Replace the main PCB or fax control PCB
machine cannot be performed nor-
PCB or fax control and check for correct operation.
mally.
PCB.
C0410 DP*1 communication problem DP installed incor- Check the installation state of the DP and
• Communication fails five times suc- rectly. adjust it if it is not properly installed.
cessively.
Defective engine Replace the engine PCB or DP driver PCB
PCB or DP driver and check for correct operation.
PCB.
C0420 First paper feeder*2 communication Paper feeder in- Check the installation state of the paper
problem stalled incorrectly. feeder and adjust it if it is not properly in-
• Communication fails five times suc- stalled.
cessively.
Defective engine Replace the engine PCB or drawer main
PCB or drawer PCB and check for correct operation.
main PCB.
C0440 Finisher*1 communication problem Finisher installed Check the installation state of the finisher
• Communication fails five times suc- incorrectly. and adjust it if it is not properly installed.
cessively.
Defective engine Replace the engine PCB or finisher main
PCB or finisher PCB and check for correct operation.
main PCB.
C0500 Second paper feeder*1 communica- Paper feeder in- Check the installation state of the paper
tion problem stalled incorrectly. feeder and adjust it if it is not properly in-
cessively.
main PCB.
1-5-19
2DA/2DB
Remarks
Code Contents
C0510 Third paper feeder*1communication Paper feeder in- Check the installation state of the paper
problem stalled incorrectly. feeder and adjust it if it is not properly in-
cessively.
main PCB.
C0610 Bitmap (DIMM) problem Defective main Replace the main PCB and check for cor-
• There is a problem with the data or PCB. rect operation.
address bus of the bitmap DRAM.
DIMM installed Check if the DIMM is inserted into the
incorrectly. socket on the main PCB correctly.
Defective DIMM. Replace the DIMM and check for correct

operation.
C0630 DMA problem Defective main Replace the main PCB and check for cor-
• DMA transmission of compressed, PCB. rect operation.
decompressed, rotated, relocated or
blanked-out image data does not
complete within the specified period
of time.
C0800 Image processing problem Defective main Replace the main PCB and check for cor-
• JAM05 is detected twice. PCB. rect operation.
C0820 Fax control PCB*1 CG ROM Defective fax con- Replace the fax control PCB and check for
checksum error trol PCB. correct operation.
• A checksum error occurred with the
CG ROM data of the fax control PCB.
C0830 Flash ROM program area checksum Defective fax con- Replace the fax control PCB and check for
error trol PCB. correct operation.
program of the fax control PCB.
C0860 Fax control PCB*1 software switch Defective fax soft- Install the fax software to Ver. 2.xx or later.
checksum error ware.
Defective fax con- Replace the fax control PCB and check for
software switch value of the fax con-
trol PCB. correct operation.
trol PCB.
C0870 Fax control PCB*1 to main PCB high- Poor contact in Check the connection of connector. Repair
capacity data transfer problem the connector ter- or replace if necessary.
• High-capacity data transfer between minals.
the fax control PCB and the main
Defective main Replace the main PCB or fax control PCB
PCB of the machine was not normally
PCB or fax control and check for correct operation.
performed even if the data transfer
PCB.
was retried the specified times.
C0880 Fax control PCB*1 program archive Defective fax con- Replace the fax control PCB and check for
problem trol PCB. correct operation.
• When power is turned on, the com-
pressed program in the Flash ROM
on the fax control PCB was not suc-
cessfully decompressed.
1-5-20
2DA/2DB
Remarks
Code Contents
C0890 Fax control PCB*1 CG font archive Defective fax con- Replace the fax control PCB and check for
problem trol PCB. correct operation.
• When power is turned on, the com-
pressed CG font in the Flash ROM on
the fax control PCB was not success-
fully decompressed.
C0900 Fax software incompatibility detec- Fax software ver- Check the version of the fax software and
tion problem sion or main soft- the main software, upgrade the version to
• Version of fax software is not compat- ware is earlier. the compatible software.
ible with that of main software.
C0920 Fax file system error Defective fax con- Replace the fax control PCB and check for
• The backup data is not retained for trol PCB. correct operation.
file system abnormality of flash
memory of the fax control PCB.
C2000 Drive motor problem Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1 the drive motor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
s, 1 s after the drive motor has turned connector termi- remedy or replace the cable.
on. nals.
Defective drive Replace the drive motor.

motor rotation
control circuit.
Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate

transmission sys- smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and
tem. gears. Check for broken gears and replace
if any.
C3100 Scanner carriage problem Poor contact of Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• The home position is not correct the connector ter- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
when the power is turned on or copy- minals. remedy or replace the cable.
ing the document placed on the con-
Defective scanner Replace the scanner home position switch.
tact glass.
home position
switch.
Defective engine Replace the engine PCB and check for

PCB. correct operation.
Defective scanner Replace the scanner motor.

motor.
C3200 Exposure lamp problem Poor contact of Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• Non-lighting of the exposure lamp is the connector ter- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
detected at the beginning of copying. minals. remedy or replace the cable.
Defective expo- Replace the exposure lamp or inverter

sure lamp or in- PCB.
verter PCB.

Incorrect shading Adjust the position of the contact glass

position. (shading plate). If the problem still occurs,
replace the scanner home position switch.
1-5-21
2DA/2DB
Remarks
Code Contents
C3300 Optical system (AGC) problem Insufficient expo- Replace the exposure lamp or inverter
• After AGC, correct input is not ob- sure lamp lumi- PCB.
tained at CCD. nosity.

Incorrect shading Adjust the position of the contact glass

position. (shading plate). If the problem still occurs,
replace the scanner home position switch.
Defective CCD Replace the ISU.

PCB.
C4000 Polygon motor synchronization Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
problem the polygon motor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• The polygon motor does not reach connector termi- remedy or replace the cable.
the stable speed within 15 s of the nals.
START signal turning on.
Defective polygon Replace the LSU.
motor.

C4010 Polygon motor steady-state problem Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• The polygon motor rotation is not the polygon motor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
stable for 5 s after the polygon motor connector termi- remedy or replace the cable.
rotation has been stabilized. nals.

motor.

C4200 BD steady-state problem Defective laser Replace the LSU.

• The MIP detects a BD error for 600 diode.
ms after the polygon motor rotation
has been stabilized.
motor.
Defective main Replace the main PCB and check for cor-
PCB. rect operation.

C6000 Broken fixing heater wire Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• In fixing warm-up, the time to reach the thermistor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
50°C/122 °F exceeds 13.5 s, the time connector termi- remedy or replace the cable.
to reach 100°C/212 °F exceeds 10 s, nals.
the time to reach the primary stabili-
Fixing thermistor Check and reinstall if necessary.
zation exceeds 10 s or the time to
installed incor-
reach the secondary stabilization ex-
rectly.
ceeds 24 s.
Fixing thermostat Check for continuity. If none, replace the
triggered. fixing thermostat.
1-5-22
2DA/2DB
Remarks
Code Contents
C6000 Broken fixing heater wire Fixing heater M or Check and reinstall if necessary.
• In fixing warm-up, the time to reach S installed incor-
50°C/122 °F exceeds 13.5 s, the time rectly.
to reach 100°C/212 °F exceeds 10 s,
Broken fixing Check for continuity. If none, replace the
the time to reach the primary stabili-
heater M or S fixing heater M or S.
zation exceeds 10 s or the time to
wire.
reach the secondary stabilization ex-
ceeds 24 s.
C6020 Abnormally high fixing unit ther- Shorted ther- Measure the resistance. If it is 0 Ω, replace
mistor temperature mistor. the thermistor.
• The fixing temperature exceeds
Broken heater Replace the power supply PCB and check
230°C/446 °F for 40 ms.
control circuit on for correct operation.
the power supply
PCB.
C6050 Abnormally low fixing unit ther- Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
mistor temperature the thermistor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• The fixing temperature remains below connector termi- remedy or replace the cable.
90°C/194°F for 1 s. nals.
Broken fixing ther- Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replace

mistor wire. the fixing thermistor.
Fixing thermistor Check and reinstall if necessary.

installed incor-
rectly.
Fixing thermostat Check for continuity. If none, replace the

triggered. fixing thermostat.
Fixing heater M or Check and reinstall if necessary.

S installed incor-
rectly.
Broken fixing Check for continuity. If none, replace the

heater M or S fixing heater M or S.
wire.
C6400 Zero-crossing signal problem Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• The engine PCB does not detect the the connector ter- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
zero-crossing signal for the time minals. remedy or replace the cable.
specified below.
Defective power Check if the zero-crossing signal is output
At power-on: 3 s
supply PCB. from YC2-5 on the power supply PCB. If
Others: 5 s
not, replace the power supply PCB.
Defective engine Replace the engine PCB if C6400 is de-

PCB. tected while YC2-5 on the power supply
PCB outputs the zero-crossing signal.
C7800 Broken external temperature ther- Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
mistor the humidity sen- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• The input voltage is 0.5 V or less. sor connector ter- remedy or replace the cable.
minals.
Defective humidity Replace the drawer PCB and check for

sensor. correct operation.
1-5-23
2DA/2DB
Remarks
Code Contents
C7810 Short-circuited external temperature Poor contact in Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
thermistor the humidity sen- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• The input voltage is 4.5 V or more. sor connector ter- remedy or replace the cable.
minals.
Defective humidity Replace the drawer PCB and check for

sensor. correct operation.
C8170 Finisher*1 front side registration mo- The front side reg- Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
tor problem istration motor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• If the front side registration home po- connector makes remedy or replace the cable.
sition sensor is on in initialization, the poor contact.
sensor does not turn off within 570
The front side reg- Replace the front side registration motor
ms of starting initialization.
istration motor and check for correct operation.
• If the front side registration home po-
malfunctions.
sition sensor is off in initialization, the
sensor does not turn on within 3180 The front side reg- Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
ms of starting initialization. istration home po- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
sition sensor con- remedy or replace the cable.
nector makes
poor contact.
The front side reg- Replace the front side registration home
istration home po- position sensor and check for correct op-
sition sensor mal- eration.
functions.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PCB and check

main PCB. for correct operation.
C8180 Finisher*1 rear side registration mo- The rear side reg- Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
tor problem istration motor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• If the rear side registration home posi- connector makes remedy or replace the cable.
tion sensor is on in initialization, the poor contact.
sensor does not turn off within 570
The rear side reg- Replace the rear side registration motor
ms of starting initialization.
istration motor and check for correct operation.
• If the rear side registration home posi-
malfunctions.
tion sensor is off in initialization, the
sensor does not turn on within 2880 The rear side reg- Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
ms of starting initialization. istration home po- tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
sition sensor con- remedy or replace the cable.
nector makes
poor contact.
The rear side reg- Replace the rear side registration home
istration home po- position sensor and check for correct op-
sition sensor mal- eration.
functions.

1-5-24
2DA/2DB
Remarks
Code Contents
C8170 Finisher*1 trailing edge registration The trailing edge Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
motor problem registration motor tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
• If the trailing edge registration home connector makes remedy or replace the cable.
position sensor is on in initialization, poor contact.
the sensor does not turn off within
The trailing edge Replace the trailing edge registration motor
570 ms of starting initialization.
registration motor and check for correct operation.
• If the trailing edge registration home
malfunctions.
position sensor is off in initialization,
the sensor does not turn on within The trailing edge Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
4550 ms of starting initialization. registration home tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
position sensor remedy or replace the cable.
connector makes
poor contact.
The trailing edge Replace the trailing edge registration home

registration home position sensor and check for correct op-
position sensor eration.
malfunctions.

C8180 Finisher*1 front stapler problem The front stapler Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-
• The front stapler home position sen- connector makes tinuity within the connector cable. If none,
sor does not change state from non- poor contact. remedy or replace the cable.
detection to detection within 200 ms
The front stapler
of the start of front stapler motor
malfunctions.
counterclockwise (forward) rotation.
a) The front sta- a) Remove the front stapler cartridge, and
• During initialization, the front stapler
pler is blocked check the cartridge and the stapling sec-
home position sensor does not
with a staple. tion of the stapler.
change state from non-detection to
b) The front sta- b) Replace the front stapler and check for
detection within 600 ms of the start of
pler is broken. correct operation.
front stapler motor clockwise (re-
verse) rotation. Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PCB and check
1-5-25
2DA/2DB
1-5-3 Image formation problems

(1) No image appears (2) No image appears (3) Image is too light. (4) Background is visible.
(entirely white). (entirely black).
See page 1-5-27 See page 1-5-27 See page 1-5-28 See page 1-5-28
(5) A white line appears (6) A black line appears (7) A black line appears (8) One side of the copy
longitudinally. longitudinally. laterally. image is darker than
the other.
(9) Black dots appear on (10) Image is blurred. (11) The leading edge of the (12) The leading edge of the
the image. image is consistently image is sporadically
misaligned with the misaligned with the
original. original.
(13) Paper creases. (14) Offset occurs. (15) Image is partly missing. (16) Fixing is poor.
(17) Image is out of focus. (18) Image center does not

align with the original
center.
See page 1-5-32 See page 1-5-33
1-5-26
2DA/2DB
(1) No image appears Causes

(entirely white). 1. No transfer charging.
2. No LSU laser is output.
3. No developing bias is output.

1. No transfer charging.
A. The connector terminals of the high-voltage Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
PCB make poor contact. connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
B. Defective engine PCB. Replace the engine PCB and check for correct operation.
C. Defective high-voltage PCB. Replace the high voltage PCB and check for correct operation.
2. No LSU laser is output.
A. Defective laser scanner unit. Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-6-29).
B. Defective main PCB. Replace the main PCB and check for correct operation.
3. No developing bias is output.
A. The connector terminals of the high-voltage Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
B. Defective engine PCB. Replace the engine PCB and check for correct operation.
C. Defective high-voltage PCB. Replace the high voltage PCB and check for correct operation.
(2) No image appears Causes

(entirely black). 1. No main charging.
2. Exposure lamp fails to light.

1. No main charging.
A. Broken main charger wire. Replace the main charger unit (see page 1-6-40).
B. Leaking main charger housing. Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.
C. The connector terminals of the high-voltage Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
D. Defective engine PCB. Check if YC9-5 on the engine PCB goes low when maintenance item
U100 is run. If not, replace the engine PCB.
E. Defective high-voltage PCB. Check if main charging takes place when YC1-12 on the high-
voltage PCB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run. If not,
replace the high-voltage PCB.
2. Exposure lamp fails to light.
A. The connector terminals of the exposure Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
lamp make poor contact. connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
B. Defective inverter PCB. Check if the exposure lamp lights when YC1-1 and 1-6 on the
inverter PCB go low while maintenance item U061 is run. If not,
replace the inverter PCB.
C. Defective engine PCB. Check if YC17-1 and YC17-6 on the engine PCB goes low when
maintenance item U061 is run. If not, replace the engine PCB.
1-5-27
2DA/2DB
(3) Image is too Causes

light. 1. Insufficient toner.
2. The transfer voltage is not output properly.
3. Dirty main charger wire.
4. Dirty main charger grid.

1. Insufficient toner. If the display shows the message requesting toner replenishment,
replace the container.
2. The transfer voltage is not output properly. Clean or check the transfer roller (see page 1-6-42).
3. Dirty main charger wire. Clean the main charger wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace the
main chager unit (see page 1-6-40).
4. Dirty main charger grid. Clean the main charger grid or, if it is extremely dirty, replace the
(4) Background is visible. Causes

1. The developing bias voltage is not properly.

1. The developing bias voltage is not properly. Replace the high voltage PCB and check for correct operation.
(5) A white line appears Causes

longitudinally. 1. Dirty main charger wire.
2. Foreign matter in the developing unit.
3. Dirty shading plate.

2. Foreign matter in the developing unit. Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. Replace the
developing unit if any foreign matter (see page 1-6-41).
3. Dirty shading plate. Clean the shading plate.
1-5-28
2DA/2DB
(6) A black line appears Causes

longitudinally. 1. Dirty contact glass.
2. Dirty or flawed drum.
3. Dirty scanner mirror.

1. Dirty contact glass. Clean the contact glass.
2. Dirty or flawed drum. Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace the drum unit
(see page 1-6-38).
3. Dirty scanner mirror. Clean the scanner mirror.
(7) A black line ap- Causes

pears laterally. 1. Dirty contact glass.
3. Dirty scanner mirror.
4. Dirty shading plate.
5. Leaking main charger housing.

2. Dirty or flawed drum. Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-38).
3. Dirty scanner mirror. Clean the scanner mirror.
4. Dirty shading plate. Clean the shading plate.
5. Leaking main charger housing. Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.
(8) One side of the Causes

copy image is 1. Dirty main charger wire.
darker than the 2. Defective exposure lamp.
other.

2. Defective exposure lamp. Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly. If not, replace
the exposure lamp and inverter PCB.
1-5-29
2DA/2DB-1
(9) Black dots appear Causes

on the image. 1. Dirty or flawed drum.
2. Dirty contact glass.
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.
4. Dirty drum separation claws.
5. Dirty heat roller separation claws.

(see page 1-6-38).
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-6-38).
4. Dirty drum separation claws. Clean the drum separation claws.
5. Dirty the heat roller separation claws. Clean the heat roller separation claws.
(10) Image is blurred. Causes

1. Scanner moves erratically.
2. Deformed press roller.
3. Paper conveying section drive problem.

1. Scanner moves erratically. Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner
rails. If any, remove it.
2. Deformed press roller. Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-45).
3. Paper conveying section drive problem. Check the gears and belts and, if necessary, grease them.
(11) The leading edge of Causes

the image is consist- 1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.
ently misaligned with 2. Misadjusted scanner leading edge
the original. registration.

1. Misadjusted leading edge registration. Readjust the leading edge registration (see pages 1-6-16).
2. Misadjusted scanner leading edge Readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-6-35).
registration.
1-5-30
2DA/2DB
(12) The leading edge of Causes

the image is sporadi- 1. Paper feed clutch, bypass paper feed solenoid
cally misaligned with or registration motor installed or operating
the original. incorrectly.

1. Paper feed clutch, bypass paper feed Check the installation position and operation of the paper feed
solenoid or registration motor installed or clutch, bypass paper feed solenoid and registration motor. If any of
operating incorrectly. them operates incorrectly, replace it.
(13) Paper creases. Causes

1. Paper curled.
2. Paper damp.
3. Defective pressure springs.
4. Defective separation.
5. Dirty separation electrode.

1. Paper curled. Check the paper storage conditions.
2. Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.
3. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.
4. Defective separation. Check the drum separation claws and heat roller separation claws.
5. Dirty separation electrode. Clean the separation electrode.
(14) Offset occurs. Causes

1. Defective cleaning blade.
2. Defective fixing section.

1. Defective cleaning blade. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-6-38).
2. Defective fixing section. Check the heat roller and press roller.
1-5-31
2DA/2DB-1
(15) Image is partly miss- Causes

ing. 1. Paper damp.
2. Paper creased.
4. Dirty transfer roller.

1. Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.
2. Paper creased. Replace the paper.
(see page 1-6-38).
4. Dirty transfer roller. Clean the transfer roller.
(16) Fixing is poor. Causes

1. Wrong paper.
2. Defective pressure springs.
3. Flawed press roller.
4. Defective fixing heater.

1. Wrong paper. Check if the paper meets specifications.
2. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.
3. Flawed press roller. Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-45).
4. Defective fixing heater. Replace the fixing heater (see page 1-6-46).
(17) Image is out of Causes

focus. 1. Defective image scanning unit.
2. Drum condensation.

1. Defective image scanning unit. Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-6-28).
2. Drum condensation. Clean the drum.
1-5-32
2DA/2DB
(18) Image center does not Causes

align with the original 1. Misadjusted center line of image printing.
center. 2. Misadjusted scanner center line.
3. Original placed incorrectly.

1. Misadjusted center line of image printing. Readjust the center line of image printing (see page 1-6-18).
2. Misadjusted scanner center line. Readjust the scanner center line (see page 1-6-36).
3. Original placed incorrectly. Place the original correctly.
1-5-33
2DA/2DB
1-5-4 Electrical problems

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(1) No electricity at the power Measure the input voltage.
The machine does outlet.
not operate when
The power cord is not Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet.
the power switch is
plugged in properly.
turned on.
The front cover or left Check the front cover and left cover.
cover is not closed com-
pletely.
Broken power cord. Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.
Defective power switch. Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the
power switch.
Blown fuse in the power Check for continuity. If none, remove the cause of blowing and
source PCB. replace the fuse.
Defective front or left cover Check for continuity across the contacts of each switch. If none,
safety switch. replace the switch.
Defective power source With AC present, check for 24 V DC at YC1-1 and 5 V DC at

PCB. YC1-7 on the power source PCB. If none, replace the power
source PCB.
(2) Poor contact in the drive Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The drive motor motor connector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
does not operate
Broken drive motor gear. Check visually and replace the drive motor if necessary.
(C2000).
Defective drive motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the drive motor oper-
ates when YC7-5 on the engine PCB goes low. If not, replace
the drive motor.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC7-5 on the engine
PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
(3) Poor contact in the regis- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The registration mo- tration motor connector nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
tor does not oper- terminals.
ate.
Broken registration motor Check visually and replace the registration motor if necessary.
gear.
Defective registration mo- Run maintenance item U030 and check if the registration motor
tor. operates when YC2-1,2,4,5 on the registration motor PCB goes
low. If not, replace the registration motor.
(4) Poor contact in the exit Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The exit motor does motor connector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
not operate.
Broken exit motor gear. Check visually and replace the exit motor if necessary.
Defective exit motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the exit motor oper-
ates when YC14-1,2,3,4 on the engine PCB go low. If not, re-
place the exit motor.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC14-1,2,3,4 on the
engine PCB go low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
1-5-34
2DA/2DB

(5) Broken scanner motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the scanner
The scanner motor motor.
does not operate.
Poor contact in the scan- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
ner motor connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nals.
(6) Broken cooling fan motor 1 Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace cooling fan
Cooling fan motor 1 coil. motor 1.
does not operate.
Poor contact in the cooling Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
fan motor 1 connector ter- nector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.
minals.
does not operate.
minals.
does not operate.
minals.
(9) Poor contact in the drawer Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The drawer drive drive motor connector ter- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
motor* does not op- minals.
erate.
Broken drawer drive motor Check visually and replace the drawer drive motor if necessary.
gear.
Defective drawer drive mo- Run maintenance item U030 and check if the drawer drive motor
tor. operates when YC9-2,3,4,5 on the drawer main PCB goes low.
If not, replace the drawer drive motor.
Defective drawer main Run maintenance item U030 and check if YC9-2,3,4,5 on the
PCB. drawer main PCB goes low. If not, replace the drawer main
PCB.
(10) Broken paper feed clutch Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paper
The paper feed coil. feed clutch.
clutch does not op-
Poor contact in the paper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
erate.
feed clutch connector ter- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
minals.
(11) Broken bypass paper feed Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the bypass
The bypass paper solenoid coil. paper feed solenoid.
feed solenoid does
Poor contact in the bypass Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
not operate.
paper feed solenoid connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nector terminals.
*: 20 ppm model only.

1-5-35
2DA/2DB

(12) Broken drawer paper feed Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the drawer
The drawer paper clutch coil. paper feed clutch.
feed clutch* does
Poor contact in the drawer Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
not operate.
paper feed clutch connec- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
tor terminals.
Defective drawer main Run maintenance item U032 and check if YC8-3 on the drawer
PCB. main PCB goes low. If not, replace the drawer main PCB.
(13) Poor contact in the clean- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The cleaning lamp ing lamp connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
does not turn on. nals.
Defective cleaning lamp. Check for continuity. If none, replace the cleaning lamp.
Defective engine PCB. If the cleaning lamp turns on when YC3-7,8 on the engine PCB
is held low, replace the engine PCB.
(14) Poor contact in the expo- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The exposure lamp sure lamp connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
does not turn on. nals.
Defective inverter PCB. Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp
turns on with YC1-1 and YC1-6 on the inverter PCB go low. If
not, replace the inverter PCB.
Defective engine PCB. Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC17-1 and YC17-6
on the engine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
(15) Defective inverter PCB. If the exposure lamp does not turn off with YC1-1 and YC1-6 on
The exposure lamp the inverter PCB high, replace the inverter PCB.
does not turn off.
Defective engine PCB. If YC17-1 and YC17-6 on the engine PCB are always low, re-
place the engine PCB.
(16) Broken wire in fixing Check for continuity across each heater. If none, replace the
The fixing heater heater M or S. heater M or S.
does not turn on
Fixing thermostat trig- Check for continuity across thermostat. If none, remove the
(C6000).
gered. cause and replace the thermostat.
(17) Broken fixing thermistor Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replace the fixing thermistor.
The fixing heater wire.
does not turn off.
Dirty sensor part of the Check visually and clean the thermistor sensor parts.
fixing thermistor.
(18) Broken main charger wire. See page 1-5-27.

Main charging is not
Leaking main charger
performed.
housing.
Poor contact in the high-

voltage PCB connector
terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Defective high- voltage

PCB.

1-5-36
2DA/2DB

(19) Poor contact in the high- See page 1-5-27.
Transfer charging is voltage PCB connector
not performed. terminals.
Defective high-voltage
PCB.
(20) Poor contact in the high- See page 1-5-27.

No developing bias voltage PCB connector
is output. terminals.
Defective high-voltage
PCB.
(21) Defective original detec- If the level of YC18-5 on the engine PCB does not change when
The original size is tion switch. the original detection switch is turned on and off, replace the
not detected. original detection switch.
(22) Original is not placed cor- Check the original and correct if necessary.
The original size is rectly.
not detected cor-
Poor contact in the original Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
rectly.
size detection sensor connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
nector terminals.
Defective original size de- Check if sensor operates correctly. If not, replace it.
tection sensor.
(23) Poor contact in the paper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The message re- switch connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
questing paper to be nals.
loaded is shown
Defective paper switch. If the level of YC8-2 on the engine PCB does not change when
when paper is
the paper switch is turned on and off, replace the paper switch.
present in the
drawer 1.
The message re- paper switch connector nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
questing paper to be terminals.
loaded is shown
Defective drawer paper If the level of YC5-2 on the drawer main PCB does not change
when paper is
switch. when the drawer paper switch is turned on and off, replace the
present in the
drawer paper switch.
drawer 2*.
(25) Poor contact in the paper Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The size of paper in length switch connector nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
the drawer 1 is not terminals.
displayed correctly.
Defective paper length Check if YC22-1,2,4 on the engine PCB goes low when the pa-
switch. per length switch is turned on. If not, replace the paper length
switch.
The size of paper in paper length switch connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
the drawer 2* is not nector terminals.
displayed correctly.
Defective drawer paper Check if YC4-5,6,8 on the drawer main PCB goes low when the
length switch. drawer paper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the
drawer paper length switch.

1-5-37
2DA/2DB

(27) A piece of paper torn from Check and remove if any.
A paper jam in the copy paper is caught
paper feed, paper around registration switch,
conveying or fixing exit switch or feedshift
section is indicated switch.
when the power
switch is turned on.
responding sensor is not light.
sensor is not light.
sponding sensor is not light.
(28) Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The message re- nector terminals of safety nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
questing covers to switch.
be closed is dis-
Defective safety switch. Check for continuity across each switch. If there is no continuity
played when the
when the switch is on, replace it.
front cover and left
cover are closed.
(29) Wiring is broken, shorted Check for continuity. If none, repair.

Others. or makes poor contact.
Noise. Locate the source of noise and remove.
1-5-38
2DA/2DB-1
1-5-5 Mechanical problems

(1) Check if the surfaces of the following rollers Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No primary paper feed. or pulleys are dirty with paper powder: for-
warding pulley, paper feed pulley, separation
pulley, registration rollers, bypass paper
feed pulley, bypass separation pad, feed
roller*, drawer forwarding pulley*, drawer
paper feed pulley* and drawer separation
pulley*.
Check if the forwarding pulley, paper feed Check visually and replace any deformed
pulley or separation pulley is deformed. pulleys (see pages 1-6-3 and 5).
Check if the drawer forwarding pulley*, Check visually and replace any deformed
drawer paper feed pulley* or drawer separa- pulleys (see pages 1-6-7 to 10).
tion pulley* is deformed.
Electrical problem with the following electro- See pages 1-5-35 and 36.
magnetic clutches: paper feed clutch, by-
pass paper feed solenoid and drawer paper
feed clutch*.
(2) Check if the surfaces of the right and left Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No secondary paper registration rollers are dirty with paper pow-
feed. der.
Electrical problem with the registration mo- See page 1-5-34.

tor.
(3) Width guide in a drawer installed incorrectly. Check the width guide visually and correct
Skewed paper feed. or replace if necessary.
Deformed width guide in a drawer. Repair or replace if necessary .
Check if a pressure spring along the paper Repair or replace.

conveying path is deformed or out of place.
(4) Check if the scanner wire is loose. Reinstall the scanner wire (see page 1-6-
The scanner does not 23).
travel.
The scanner motor malfunctions. See page 1-5-35.
(5) Check if the separation pulley or drawer Replace the separation pulley if it is worn
Multiple sheets of paper separation pulley* is worn. (see pages 1-6-3 and 8).
are fed at one time.
Check if the paper is curled. Change the paper.
(6) Check if the paper is excessively curled. Change the paper.

Paper jams.
Deformed guides along the paper conveying Repair or replace if necessary.
path.
Check if the contact between the right and Check visually and remedy if necessary.
left registration rollers is correct.
Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or Clean or replace the press roller (see page
deformed. 1-6-45).
Check if the contact between the heat roller Repair if any springs are off the separation
and its separation claws is correct. claws.
Check if the contact between the exit roller Check visually and remedy if necessary.
and pulley is correct.

1-5-39
2DA/2DB

(7) Check if the developing unit is extremely Clean the developing unit.
Toner drops on the pa- dirty.
per conveying path.
(8) Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears oper- Grease the bearings and gears.
Abnormal noise is ate smoothly.
heard.
Check if the following electromagnetic Correct.
clutches are installed correctly: paper feed
clutch, bypass paper feed solenoid and
drawer paper feed clutch*.

1-5-40
2DA/2DB
1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly
(1) Precautions
• Be sure to turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly.
• When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.
• Do not touch any PCB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
• Use only the specified parts to replace the fixing unit thermostat. Never substitute electric wires, as the MFP may be
seriously damaged.
• Use the following testers when measuring voltages:
Hioki 3200
Sanwa MD-180C
Sanwa YX-360TR
Beckman TECH300
Beckman DM45
Beckman 330*
Beckman 3030*
Beckman DM850*
Fluke 8060A*
Arlec DMM1050
Arlec YF1030C
* Capable of measuring RMS values.
• Prepare the following as test originals:
1. NTC (new test chart)
2. NPTC (newspaper test chart)
1-6-1
2DA/2DB
(2) Running a maintenance item
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the up/down cursor keys
The maintenance item is
or numeric keys.
selected.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter “001” using the up/down

cursor keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
1-6-2
2DA/2DB
1-6-2 Paper feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting the separation pulley

Follow the procedure below to replace the separation pulley.
Procedure
1. Open the front cover and left cover. Remove
the waste toner box.
2. Pull out the drawer.
Drawer
Figure 1-6-1
3. Remove the screw and then the front left

lower cover.
Front left lower

cover
Figure 1-6-2
4. Remove the screw and then the lower paper

feed unit.
Lower paper feed unit
Figure 1-6-3
1-6-3
2DA/2DB
5. Remove the separation pulley unit from the

lower paper feed unit.
6. Remove the separation pulley from the
separation pulley unit.
7. Replace the separation pulley and refit all the
removed parts.
Separation pulley
Separation pulley unit
Figure 1-6-4
1-6-4
2DA/2DB
(2) Detaching and refitting the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley
Follow the procedure below to replace the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley.
Procedure
1. Remove the lower paper feed unit (see page Stop ring
1-6-3).
2. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-6-38).
4. Remove the paper feed clutch, stop ring and
bushing at the machine rear.
Paper feed clutch
Bushing
Figure 1-6-5
5. Remove the screw and then the registration

guide.
Registration guide
Figure 1-6-6
6. Remove the screw and then the upper paper Upper paper feed unit
feed unit.
Figure 1-6-7
1-6-5
2DA/2DB
7. Remove the springs, stop ring and bushing

and then the shaft holder from the upper
paper feed unit. Shaft holder
Spring
Spring
Stop ring
Upper paper feed unit Bushing
Figure 1-6-8
8. Remove the forwarding pulley from the upper

Paper feed pulley
paper feed unit.
9. Remove the paper feed pulley from the upper
paper feed unit.
10. Replace the forwarding pulley and paper feed
pulley and refit all the removed parts.
Forwarding pulley
Figure 1-6-9
1-6-6
2DA/2DB-1
(3) Detaching and refitting the feed roller (20 ppm model only)
Follow the procedure below to replace the feed roller.
Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover, right cover and front
left lower cover.
2. Remove the three screws and then remove
the main body from the paper feeder.
Screw
Screw
Paper feeder
Screw
Figure 1-6-10-1
3. Open the drawer left cover.
4. Remove the two stop ring, gear and spring
pin from rear side of the feed roller.
* When removing the gear, take care not to
lose the spring pin.
5. Slide the bearings in the front and rear of the
feed roller toward the inside, push the feed
roller once into the rear side of the machine,
and then remove it from the paper feeder.
6. Remove the two bushing from front and rear
side of the feed roller.
7. Replace the feed roller and refit all the
removed parts.
Stop rings
Gear
Bushing
Spring pin
Feed roller Feed roller
Bushing
Figure 1-6-10-2
1-6-7
2DA/2DB
(4) Detaching and refitting the drawer separation pulley (20 ppm model only)
Follow the procedure below to replace the drawer separation pulley.
Procedure
1. Pull out the drawer. Open the drawer left
cover.
2. Remove the screw and then the lower paper
feed unit.
Figure 1-6-11
3. Remove the drawer separation pulley unit

from the lower paper feed unit.
4. Remove the drawer separation pulley from
the drawer separation pulley unit.
5. Replace the drawer separation pulley and
refit all the removed parts.
Drawer separation pulley
Drawer separation
pulley unit
Figure 1-6-12
1-6-8
2DA/2DB-1
(5) Detaching and refitting the drawer forwarding pulley and drawer paper feed pulley (20 ppm model only)
Follow the procedure below to replace the drawer forwarding pulley and drawer paper feed pulley.
Procedure
1. Remove the main body from the paper feeder Stop ring Stop ring
(see page 1-6-7).
2. Remove the lower paper feed unit (see page
1-6-8).
3. Remove the drawer rear cover.
4. Remove the stop ring and drawer paper feed
clutch from the machine rear side. Remove
the stop ring and bushing.
Drawer paper
feed clutch Bushing
Figure 1-6-13
5. Remove the screw and then the upper paper

feed unit. Upper paper feed unit
Figure 1-6-14
1-6-9
2DA/2DB-1
6. Remove the springs, stop ring and bushing

and then the shaft holder from the upper Shaft holder
paper feed unit. Spring
Spring
Stop ring
Upper paper feed unit Bushing
Figure 1-6-15
7. Remove the drawer forwarding pulley from Drawer paper feed pulley
the upper paper feed unit.
8. Remove the drawer paper feed pulley from
the upper paper feed unit.
9. Replace the drawer forwarding pulley and
drawer paper feed pulley and refit all the
removed parts.
Drawer forwarding pulley
Figure 1-6-16
1-6-10
2DA/2DB
(6) Detaching and refitting the paper conveying unit

Follow the procedure below to maintenance of the paper feed section.
Procedure
2. Remove the strap from the rear side. Restore
the paper conveying unit. Remove the fitting
projection and pin, and then remove the Left cover
stopper from the front side.
3. Open the left cover until it is put horizontally.
Fitting projection
Strap
Stopper
Pin
Figure 1-6-17
4. Push the fitting portions of the fixtures located

on the front and rear and then remove the
fixtures from the left cover.
Fixture
5. Remove the left cover from the MFP.
Left cover Fixture
Figure 1-6-18
1-6-11
2DA/2DB
6. Push the fitting portions of the bypass upper

cover. Remove the bypass upper cover from
the bypass unit.
Bypass upper cover
Figure 1-6-19
7. Detach the connector and remove the bypass

lower cover from the MFP.
Connector
Bypass lower cover
Figure 1-6-20
8. Remove the paper conveying unit from the

MFP.
Paper conveying unit
Figure 1-6-21
1-6-12
2DA/2DB
(7) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper feed pulley and bypass separation pad
Follow the procedure below to replace the bypass paper feed pulley and bypass separation pad.
Procedure
1. Open the front cover and remove the waste
toner box. Pull out the drawer.
2. Remove the screw and then the front left
lower cover.
Front left lower

cover
Figure 1-6-22
3. Remove the paper conveying unit (see page Stop ring

1-6-11).
4. Remove the stop ring and bushing at the
machine front side.
Bushing
Figure 1-6-23

6. Remove the stop ring and bypass paper feed
clutch gear at the machine rear side.
Stop ring
Bypass paper feed clutch gear
Figure 1-6-24
1-6-13
2DA/2DB
7. Temporarily push the bypass paper feed

Bypass paper feed pulley unit
pulley unit into the rear side to unlock the
front side and then remove it from the MFP.
Figure 1-6-25
8. Remove the bypass paper feed pulley from

the bypass paper feed pulley shaft.
Bypass paper feed
pulley shaft
Bypass paper feed pulley
Figure 1-6-26
9. Push the fitting portions of the bypass

separation pad. Remove the bypass
Bypass separation pad
separation pad from the MFP.
10. Replace the bypass paper feed pulley and
bypass separation pad and refit all the
removed parts.
Figure 1-6-27
1-6-14
2DA/2DB
(8) Detaching and refitting the registration left roller

Follow the procedure below to replace the registration left roller.
Procedure
1. Remove the paper conveying unit (see page Stopper
1-6-11). Paper conveying unit
2. Remove the transfer roller (see page 1-6-42).
3. Release the stoppers at the front and rear
side, and then remove the registration left Stopper
roller from the paper conveying unit.
4. Replace the registration left roller and refit all
the removed parts.
Registration left roller
Figure 1-6-28
(9) Detaching and refitting the registration cleaner

Follow the procedure below to replace the registration cleaner.
Procedure
1. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-6-38). Trans guide film
guide.
Registration guide
Figure 1-6-29

cleaner.
4. Replace the registration cleaner and refit all
the removed parts.
Registration cleaner
Figure 1-6-30
1-6-15
2DA/2DB
(10) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement

Perform the following adjustment after refitting rollers and clutches.
(10-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing

Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
U066 U071
U034
(P. 1-6-35) (P. 1-4-17)
Caution:
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
Procedure Leading edge registration
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Correct image Output Output

Enter “034” using the numeric keys. example 1 example 2
Figure 1-6-31
Select the “ADJ. RCL ON TIMING”

using the up/down cursor keys.

RCL ON: Drawer
RCL BYP: Bypass tray
RCL T1: Optional first paper feeder (standard for 20 ppm model)
Select the items to be adjusted RCL T2: Optional second paper feeder
using the up/down cursor keys. RCL T3: Optional third paper feeder
RCL DUP: Duplex copying (second face)
Press the interrupt key. Press the start key
The new setting is stored

Press the start key
to output a test pattern.
For output example 1, decrease

the value using the left cursor
Is the leading edge No key.
registration correct? For output example 2, increase
the value using the right cursor
Yes key.
Setting range (Initial setting)
Press the stop/clear key to exit RCL ON: –5.0 – +10.0 (0.9)
maintenance mode. RCL BYP: –5.0 – +10.0 (1.2)
RCL T1: –5.0 – +10.0 (1.3)
RCL T2: –5.0 – +10.0 (1.3)
RCL T3: –5.0 – +10.0 (1.3)
End RCL DUP: –5.0 – +10.0 (1.0)
Changing the value by 1 moves the
leading edge by 0.1 mm.
1-6-16
2DA/2DB
(10-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image and the leading
edge of the original during memory copying.
U053 U034 U065 U066 U403

U407
(P. 1-4-13) (P. 1-6-16) (P. 1-6-34) (P. 1-6-35) (P. 1-6-37)
Caution:
Before making the following adjustment, ensure the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
Start
Original Copy Copy

Press the start key. Figure 1-6-32
Press the interrupt key. Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.

Press the start key
and make a test copy.
For copy example 1, increase the

Is the leading edge No value using the right cursor key.
registration correct? For copy example 2, decrease the
value using the left cursor key.
Yes Setting range: –2.0 – +2.0
Initilal setting: 0.0
Press the stop/clear key to
Changing the value by 1 moves
exit maintenance mode.
the leading edge by 0.1 mm.
End
1-6-17
2DA/2DB
(10-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing

Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original when
paper is fed from the drawer.
U067 U072
U034
(P. 1-6-36) (P. 1-4-18)
Caution:
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
Procedure
Center line of printing
Start
Enter “034” using the numeric keys. Correct image Output Output
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-6-33
Select the “ADJ. LSU OUT TIMING”


LSU OUT: Drawer
LSU BYP: Bypass tray
LSU T1: Optional first paper feeder (standard for 20 ppm model)
Select the items to be adjusted
LSU T2: Optional second paper feeder
LSU T3: Optional third paper feeder
LSU DUP: Duplex copying (second face)
Press the start key

For output example 1, decrease

No the value using the left cursor key.
Is the image correct?
For output example 2, increase
the value using the right cursor key.
Yes Setting range (Initial setting)
LSU OUT: –7.0 – +10.0 (–1.0)
Press the stop/clear key to exit LSU BYP: –7.0 – +10.0 (0.4)
maintenance mode. LSU T1: –7.0 – +10.0 (–1.2)
LSU T1: –7.0 – +10.0 (–1.2)
LSU T1: –7.0 – +10.0 (–1.2)
LSU DUP: –7.0 – +10.0 (0.3)
End Changing the value by 1 moves the
center line by 0.1 mm.
1-6-18
2DA/2DB
(10-4) Adjusting the trailing edge margin of image printing

Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the trailing edges of the copy image and original.
Procedure
Start

Trailing edge margin
Correct image Output

Enter “034” using the numeric keys. example
Figure 1-6-34
Select the “ADJ. MGN REAR”

Press the interrupt key. Press the start key
The new setting is stored

Press the start key
Is the trailing edge No For output example, increase

margin correct? the value using the right cursor
key.
Yes Setting range: –4.0 – +10.0

Initial setting: 0.0
Press the stop/clear key to exit Changing the value by 1 moves the
maintenance mode. trailing edge by 0.1 mm.
Increasing the setting makes the margin
narrower, and decreasing it makes the
margin wider.
End
1-6-19
2DA/2DB-1
(10-5) Adjusting the margins for printing

Make the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
U403 U404
U402
(P. 1-6-37) (P. 1-4-44)
Caution:
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the margins are still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in
maintenance mode.
Procedure
Start
Enter “402” using the numeric keys.
LEAD: Printer leading edge margin

Select the items to be adjusted
AC: Printer left/right margins
TRAIL: Printer trailing edge margin

Press the start key to output a test
pattern using A3/11" × 17" paper.
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the right cursor
No
Are the margins correct? key makes the margin wider.
Decreasing the value using the left cursor
key makes the margin narrower.
Yes
Setting range (initial setting)
Yes Proceed to LEAD: 0.0 – +10.0 (3.0)
another mode? AC: –3.4 – +10.0 (3.0)
TRAIL: –5.0 – +10.0 (4.0)
No
leading edge by 0.1 mm.
exit maintenance mode. Printer leading edge margin
(3 ± 2.5 mm)
Ejection direction
End (reference)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
+1.5
(2.5–2.0 mm) (2.5+1.5
–2.0 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin

(3 ± 2.5 mm)
Figure 1-6-35
1-6-20
2DA/2DB-1
(10-6) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper

Make the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper is
Z-folded.
Procedure
Start
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-6-36
Press the start key. PF1: Drawer

BYPASS: Bypass tray
PF2: Optional first paper feeder (standard for 20 ppm model)
Select the items to be adjusted PF3: Optional second paper feeder
using the up/down cursor keys. PF4: Optional third paper feeder
DUPLEX: Duplex copying (second face)

Press the start key
to make a test copy.
Is the leading
edge of the image missing Yes
or varying randomly (copy Increase the value using the right cuusor key.
example 1)?
No
Is the copy
paper Z-folded (copy Yes
Decrease the value using the left cursor key.
example 2)?
PF1: –50 – +127 (20)
No BYPASS: –50 – +127 (0)
PF2: –50 – +127 (0)
PF3: –50 – +127 (–20)
Press the stop/clear key to PF4: –50 – +127 (–20)
exit maintenance mode. DUPLEX: –50 – +127 (0)
The greater the value,
the larger the amount of slack;
the smaller the value, the smaller
End the amount of slack.
1-6-21
2DA/2DB
1-6-3 Optical section
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp

Take the following procedure when the exposure lamp is to be replaced.
Procedure Contact glass

1. Remove the original cover or the DP.
2. Remove the two screws holding the upper
right cover and then the cover. Remove the
contact glass.
Upper right cover
Figure 1-6-37
3. Move the mirror 1 frame to the cutouts of the Clamps

machine.
* When moving the mirror 1 frame, do not
touch the exposure lamp nor the inverter
PCB.
4. Detach the exposure lamp connector from the
inverter PCB and release the wire from three
clamps.
Connector
Inverter PCB
Figure 1-6-38
5. Remove the two screws holding the exposure

Exposure lamp
lamp and then the lamp.
6. Replace the exposure lamp and refit all the
removed parts.
Figure 1-6-39
1-6-22
2DA/2DB
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires

Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced.
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires
Procedure Upper rear cover

1. Remove the exposure lamp (see page 1-6-
22).
2. Remove the two screws holding the upper
rear cover and then the cover. Remove the
two screws holding the middle left cover and
upper left cover and then the covers.
Upper left cover
Middle left cover
Figure 1-6-40
3. Remove the screw and then the slit retainer Slit glass
and slit glass. Detach the fitting portions and
then remove the front scanner cover.
Front scanner cover
Slit retainer
Figure 1-6-41
4. Remove the inverter wire guide and then Inverter wire guide
detach the inverter wire from the inverter
PCB.
Inverter wire
Inverter PCB
Figure 1-6-42
1-6-23
2DA/2DB
5. Remove the screw holding each of the front Mirror 1 frame

and rear wire retainers and then remove the
mirror 1 frame from the scanner unit.
Front wire Rear wire

retainer retainer
Figure 1-6-43
6. Unhook the round terminal of the scanner Round terminal

wire from the scanner tension spring on the
left side of the scanner unit.
Round terminal
7. Remove the scanner wire.
Scanner tension springs
Figure 1-6-44
1-6-24
2DA/2DB
(2-2) Fitting the scanner wires
Caution:
When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below.
Machine front: P/N 2C91236 (gray)
Machine rear: P/N 2C91235 (black)
Fitting requires the following tools:

Two frame securing tools (P/N 2AV6808)
Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 3596811)
Procedure
1. Remove the screw and then scanner wire
drum gear at the machine rear side.
Scanner wire
drum gear
Figure 1-6-45
2. Remove the stop ring and bushing from the

front of the scanner wire drum shaft.
3. Remove the scanner wire drum shaft from the Scanner wire drum shaft
scanner unit.
Bushing
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-46
1-6-25
2DA/2DB
4. Insert the locating ball on each of the scanner

wires into the hole in the respective scanner
wire drum and wind the scanner wire three
turns inward and four turns outward.
• With the locating ball as the reference point,
wind the shorter end of each of the wires
outward.
Scanner wire stoppers
5. Secure the scanner wires using the scanner
wire stoppers.
Three turns inward Three turns inward
Locating ball
Four turns outward Four turns outward
Scanner wire drum
Figure 1-6-47
6. Refit the scanner wire drum shaft to the Frame securing tool
scanner unit. Frame securing tool
7. Insert the two frame securing tools into the
positioning holes at the front and rear of the
scanner unit to pin the mirror 2 frame in
position.
Mirror 2 frame
Figure 1-6-48
1-6-26
2DA/2DB
8. Loop the outer ends of the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame,
winding from below to above. ......................................................................................................................... 1
9. Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside the scanner unit. .............................................................. 2
10. Loop the inner ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys at the left of the scanner unit,
winding from below to above. ......................................................................................................................... 3
11. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from above to
below. .............................................................................................................................................................. 4
12. Wind the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire guides at the left of the scanner unit. ........ 5
13. Hook the round terminals onto the scanner tension springs. .......................................................................... 6
Figure 1-6-49
14. Remove the scanner wire stoppers and frame

securing tools. Frame securing tool
15. Gather the scanner wires toward the locating
balls. Frame securing tool
16. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to
correctly locate the wires in position.
17. Put the mirror 1 frame on the scanner rail and
move it toward the left side of the machine.
18. Insert the frame securing tools into the
positioning holes (leftmost holes) at the front
and the rear of the scanner unit and screw
the mirror 1 frame while securing both the
mirror 1 frame and the mirror 2 frame.
19. Remove the two frame securing tools.
20. Refit all the removed parts. Mirror 2 frame
Mirror 1 frame
Figure 1-6-50
1-6-27
2DA/2DB
(3) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference)

Take the following procedure when the ISU is to be replaced.
Procedure
• Detaching the ISU ISU cover
1. Remove the contact glass (see page 1-6-22).
2. Remove the four screws holding the ISU
cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-6-51
CCD PCB
3. Detach the CCD wire from the CCD PCB. CCD wire
4. Remove the four screws holding the ISU and
then the ISU.
5. Replace the ISU.
ISU
Figure 1-6-52
• Refitting the ISU ISU

Positioning holes
1. Align the positioning holes of the ISU by
pushing it a little and attach the ISU to the
scanner unit.
* Attach the ISU with reference to marking "C".
2. Secure the ISU using the four screws.
3. Refit the CCD wire to CCD PCB.
C
M
Marking
Figure 1-6-53
1-6-28
2DA/2DB
(4) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit

Take the following procedure when the laser scanner unit is to be replaced.
Procedure
1. Remove the original cover or the DP.
2. Remove the upper right cover, contact glass,
upper rear cover, middle left cover, upper left
cover, slit glass and front scanner cover (see
page 1-6-23).
3. Remove the four screws holding the right
cover and then the cover. Remove the seven
screws holding the rear cover and then the
cover.
Right cover
Rear cover
Figure 1-6-54
4. Detach the connector YC8 on the main PCB.

Detach the connectors YC16, YC17, YC18
and YC19 on the engine PCB.
YC8
YC16
YC19
YC18
YC17
Figure 1-6-55
1-6-29
2DA/2DB
5. Remove the four pins holding the scanner Pin

unit and then the unit.
Pin
Scanner unit
Pin
Pin
Figure 1-6-56
6. Remove the screw holding the exit cover and Exit cover Inner rear cover
then the cover. Remove the two screws
holding the inner rear cover and then the
cover.
Figure 1-6-57
7. Remove the front and rear left cover.

Rear left
cover
Front left cover

Figure 1-6-58
1-6-30
2DA/2DB
8. Remove the two screws holding the exit unit

and then pull out the unit a little.
Exit unit
Figure 1-6-59
9. Remove the exit tray. Exit tray
Figure 1-6-60
10. Remove the four screws and detach the two Connector
connector and then remove the laser scanner
unit.
11. Replace the laser scanner unit and refit all
the removed parts.
Laser scanner
unit Connector
Figure 1-6-61
1-6-31
2DA/2DB
(5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference)

Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is longitudinally skewed (longitudinal squareness not obtained).
Caution:
• Adjust the amount of slack in the paper (page 1-6-21) first. Check for the longitudinal squareness of the copy image,
and if it is not obtained, perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment.
• Before making the following adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for
the adjustment.
Procedure
Start
Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Place the original
on the contact glass. Figure 1-6-62
Retighten the two screws and

Press the start key and make refit the contact glass.
a test copy at 100% magnification.
Remove the contact glass.

Loosen the two screws and
adjust the position of the
No mirror 2 frame.
Is the image correct? For copy example 1,
move the frame in the direction of
the white arrow (e).
Yes For copy example 2,
move the frame in the direction of
the black arrow (b).
End
Screws
Figure 1-6-63
1-6-32
2DA/2DB
(6) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction

Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is not correct.
U053 U065 U065 U067

(main scanning (auxiliary scanning
(P. 1-4-13) direction) direction) (P. 1-6-34) (P. 1-6-36)
Caution:
Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Also, perform “(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction” (page 1-6-34) and “(9)
Adjusting the scanner center line” (page 1-6-36) after this adjustment.
Procedure
Start

Original Copy Copy
example example 2
Figure 1-6-64
Select the “MAIN SCAN ADJ”


The new setting
Place an original and press is stored.
the start key to make a test copy.

No value using the right cursor key.
Is the image correct? For copy example 2, decrease the
Yes Setting range: –25 – +25

Initial setting: 0
Press the stop/clear key to Changing the value by 1 changes
exit maintenance mode. the magnification by 0.1%.
Increasing the value makes
the image wider, and decreasing it
makes the image narrower.
End
1-6-33
2DA/2DB
(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction

Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is not correct.
U053 U065 U065 U070

(main scanning (auxiliary scanning
(P. 1-4-13) direction) (P. 1-6-33) direction) (P. 1-4-16)
Caution:
Procedure
Start

Original Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 1-6-65
Select the “SUB SCAN ADJ”


The new setting
Place an original and press is stored.

value using the right cursor key.
No For copy example 2, decrease the
Is the image correct?
Yes Setting range: –25 – +25

Initial setting: –10
Press the stop/clear key to Changing the value by 1 changes
exit maintenance mode. the magnification by 0.1%.
Increasing the value makes
the image longer, and decreasing it
make the image shorter.
End
1-6-34
2DA/2DB
(8) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration

Perform the following adjustment if there is regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
U034 U071
U066
(P. 1-6-16) (P. 1-4-17)
Caution:
Procedure
Scanner leading edge registration
Start
Original Copy Copy

Figure 1-6-66
Select the items to be adjusted ADJUST DATA 1:

using the up/down cursor keys. ADJUST DATA 2:

The new setting
is stored.
Place an original and press
For copy example 1, decrease

Is the scanner No the value using the left cursor key.
leading edge registration
For copy example 2, increase
correct?
Yes
ADJUST DATA 1: –32 – +32 (7)
ADJUST DATA 2: –20 – +20 (0)
exit maintenance mode.
the leading edge by 0.17 mm.
End
1-6-35
2DA/2DB
(9) Adjusting the scanner center line

Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
U034 U072
U067
(P. 1-6-18) (P. 1-4-18)
Caution:
Procedure
Scanner center line
Start
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 1-6-67
Select the items to be adjusted ADJUST DATA 1:

using the up/down cursor keys. ADJUST DATA 2:
The new setting

is stored.
Place an original and press
For copy example 1, decrease

Is the scanner No the value using the left cursor key.
center line correct? For copy example 2, increase
Yes
Press the stop/clear key to ADJUST DATA 1: –39 – +39 (–4)
exit maintenance mode. ADJUST DATA 2: –39 – +39 (0)
the center line
ADJUST DATA 1: 0.17 mm
End ADJUST DATA 2: 0.084 mm
1-6-36
2DA/2DB-1
(10) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Perform the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
U402 U404
U403
(P. 1-6-20) (P. 1-4-44)
Caution:
Procedure
Start
A MARGIN: Scanner left margin

Select the items to be adjusted B MARGIN: Scanner leading edge margin
using the up/down cursor keys. C MARGIN: Scanner right margin
D MARGIN: Scanner trailing edge margin
The new setting

is stored.
Press the start key
to make a test copy
(A test copy is output at the
reduction ratio of 95%).
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the right
No cursor key makes the margin wider.
Are the margins correct?
Decreasing the value using the left
cursor key makes the margin
Yes narrower.
Yes Setting range (Initial setting)

Proceed to another mode? A MARGIN: 0.0 – +10.0 (2.0)
B MARGIN: 0.0 – +10.0 (3.0)
C MARGIN: 0.0 – +10.0 (2.0)
No D MARGIN: 0.0 – +10.0 (2.0)
Press the stop/clear key to leading edge by 0.1 mm.
exit maintenance mode. Scanner leading edge margin (3 ± 2.5 mm)
End Ejection direction

(reference)
Scanner Scanner
left margin right margin
(2.5+1.5
–2.0 mm) (2.5+1.5
–2.0 mm)
Scanner trailing edge margin

(3 ± 2.5 mm)
Figure 1-6-68
1-6-37
2DA/2DB
1-6-4 Drum section
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum unit

Follow the procedure below to replace the drum unit.
Cautions:
• Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit.
• Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit.
Procedure
1. Open the front cover and left cover. Remove Inner cover
the waste toner box and toner container.
3. Remove the screw holding the developing
release lever.
4. Pull the developing release lever and then
release the developing unit.
Developing release lever
Figure 1-6-69
5. Remove the screw and detach the connector

and then remove the drum unit from MFP.
6. Replace the drum unit and refit all the
removed parts.
Connector
Drum unit
Figure 1-6-70
1-6-38
2DA/2DB
(2) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claws

Follow the procedure below to replace the drum separation claws.
Procedure
2. Push the drum separation claws with the
minus driver from the top of the corner hole
Drum unit
and remove the claws.
3. Replace the drum separation claws and refit
all the removed parts.
Drum separation claws
Coner hole
Drum
separation
claw
Figure 1-6-71
1-6-39
2DA/2DB
(3) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit

Follow the procedure below to replace the main charger unit.
Procedure
1. Open the front cover and remove the waste
toner box and inner cover.
2. While lifting the main charger unit toward the Main charger
release lever
upper right, remove the unit from the MFP.
3. While pressing the main charger release
lever in the direction indicated by the arrow at
the removal stopper position to release the
removal stopper, remove the main charger
unit from the MFP.
4. Replace the main charger unit and refit all the
removed parts.
Main charger unit
Figure 1-6-72
1-6-40
2DA/2DB
1-6-5 Developing section
(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit

Follow the procedure below to replace the developing unit.
Procedure
2. While lifting the developing unit a little,
remove the unit from the MFP.
3. Replace the developing unit and refit all the
removed parts.
Developing unit
Figure 1-6-73
1-6-41
2DA/2DB
1-6-6 Transfer section
(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller

Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller.
Procedure
1. Remove the paper conveying unit (see page Rear release
1-6-11). lever stopper
2. Remove the screw holding each of the front
Front release
and rear release lever stoppers and then the lever stopper
stoppers from the release lever shaft.
Paper conveying unit
Figure 1-6-74
3. Detach the fitting portions located on the front

and rear and then remove the transfer roller
from the paper conveying unit. Paper conveying unit
4. Replace the transfer roller and refit all the
removed parts.
Transfer roller
Fitting portion Fitting portion
Figure 1-6-75
1-6-42
2DA/2DB-1
1-6-7 Fixing section
(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit

Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing unit.
Procedure
1. Open the front cover and left cover and then
remove the inner cover.
2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver or the like
through the groove at the left side of the
machine and unlock the engaged portion of
front left cover 1 to remove it.
Front left cover 1
Figure 1-6-76
Front left cover 2

3. Remove the screw and then remove the front
left cover 2.
Screw
Figure 1-6-77
4. Remove the screw and then remove the

stopper and spacer.
When attaching the spacer, place the fixing
unit on the original step.
Stopper
Spacer
Figure 1-6-78
1-6-43
2DA/2DB-1
5. Remove the screw and detach the two

connectors and then remove the fixing unit
from MFP.
6. Replace the fixing unit and refit all the
removed parts.
Connectors
Fixing unit
Figure 1-6-79
1-6-44
2DA/2DB-1
(2) Detaching and refitting the press roller

Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller.
Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-43).
2. Remove the two screws and then separate
the fixing right unit and left unit.
Fixing right unit
Fixing left unit
Figure 1-6-80
3. Remove the three screws holding the press Press roller guide
roller guide from fixing right unit.
Fixing right unit
Figure 1-6-81
4. Remove the press roller from the fixing right

unit. Fixing right unit
5. Replace the press roller and refit all the
removed parts.
Press roller
Figure 1-6-82
1-6-45
2DA/2DB-1
(3) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater M and S

Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing heater M and S.
Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit and separate the fixing
right unit and left unit (see pages 1-6-43, 45).
2. Remove the two screws holding each of the
fixing heater M and S on the front and rear of
the fixing left unit.
Fixing heater S Fixing heater S
Fixing heater M Fixing heater M
Figure 1-6-83
3. Pull out the fixing heater M and S from the

fixing left unit.
4. Replace the fixing heater M and S, and refit
all the removed parts.
Fixing heater M
Fixing heater S
Figure 1-6-84
1-6-46
2DA/2DB-1
(4) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws

Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws.
Procedure
2. Detach the fitting portions and then remove Fixing left unit
the heat roller guide from the fixing left unit.
Heat roller guide
Figure 1-6-85
3. Remove the heat roller separation claws from

the fixing left unit. Fixing left unit
4. Replace the heat roller separation claws and
refit all the removed parts.
Heat roller separation claws
Figure 1-6-86
1-6-47
2DA/2DB-1
(5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller

Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller.
Procedure
2. Remove the heat roller separation claws.
(see page 1-6-47).
3. Pull out the heat roller bushing from the fixing
left unit and then remove the heat roller.
4. Replace the heat roller and refit all the
removed parts. Heat roller bushing
Heat roller
Heat roller bushing
Fixing left unit
Figure 1-6-87
1-6-48
2DA/2DB-1
(6) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermostat

Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing thermostat.
Procedure
right unit and left unit (see pages 1-6-43, 45). Fixing thermostat
2. Remove the heat roller (see page 1-6-48).
3. Remove the two screws holding the fixing
thermostat and then the thermostat.
4. Replace the fixing thermostat and refit all the
removed parts.
Figure 1-6-88
(7) Detaching and refitting the fixing thermistor

Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing thermistor.
Procedure
2. Remove the heat roller (see page 1-6-48).
3. Remove the screw holding the fixing
thermistor and then the thermistor.
4. Replace the fixing thermistor and refit all the
removed parts.
Fixing thermistor
Figure 1-6-89
1-6-49
2DA/2DB-1
(8) Adjusting the fixing unit height (adjusting lateral squareness)

Follow the procedure below if the drum is not parallel to the fixing unit and therefore paper is not fed straight to the fixing
section and the trailing edge of image on either the front or rear side becomes longer.
Procedure
1. Remove the front left cover 1 and 2 (see
pages 1-6-43).
2. Remove the screw and then remove the
stopper.
3. Loosen the screw holding the fixing unit.
Stopper
Screw Spacer
Figure 1-6-90
4. In the case of copy example 1 (the trailing

edge of image of the machine rear side
becomes longer): Place the fixing unit on the
third step from the bottom of the spacer to
adjust the spacer position (height adjustment
of +0.5 mm).
In the case of copy example 2 (the trailing
edge of image of the machine front side Original Copy Copy
becomes longer): Place the fixing unit on the example 1 example 2
first step from the bottom of the spacer to
adjust the spacer position (height adjustment Figure 1-6-91
of -0.5 mm).
Height adjustment: 0 mm Height adjustment: +0.5 mm Height adjustment: -0.5 mm

(Second step from the bottom) (Third step from the bottom) (First step from the bottom)
Fixing unit
Spacer
Stopper
[Cross section viewing from the right side of the machine]
Figure 1-6-92
5. Retighten the screw holding the fixing unit

and refit the stopper.
1-6-50
2DA/2DB-1
1-7-1 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB
Firmware upgrading requires the following tools:

Compact Flash (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended.)
NOTE
When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer, be sure to format it in advance.
Procedure
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the
power plug.
3. Insert Compact Flash in a socket of the
machine (insert the surface of Compact Flash
toward the machine rear).
4. Insert the power plug and turn the power
switch on. Upgrading firmware starts.
Caution:
Never turn the power switch off during
upgrading.
5. “Completed” is indicated on the message
display when upgrading is complete.
power plug.
7. Remove Compact Flash from the machine
and refit the rear cover.
switch on.
Compact Flash
Socket
Figure 1-7-1
1-7-1
2DA/2DB
1-7-2 Upgrading the printer board firmware
Firmware upgrading requires the following tools:

Compact Flash (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended.)
NOTE
When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer, be sure to format it in advance.
Procedure
power plug.
2. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the
machine (insert the surface of Compact Flash
toward the machine rear).
switch on. Upgrading firmware starts.
Caution:
Never turn the power switch off during
upgrading. Compact Flash
4. “Completed” is indicated on the message
display when upgrading is complete.
power plug.
6. Remove Compact Flash from the machine
and refit the rear cover.
switch on.
Notch hole
Figure 1-7-2
1-7-2
2DA/2DB
1-7-3 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR)
The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field.
• High-voltage PCB: VR201, VR202, VR301
• Drum unit zener PCB: VR1
1-7-4 Remarks on PCBs replacement
Confirm the version of the firmware and upgrade the version in up-to-date state when replacing PCBs.
When replacing the engine PCB or main PCB, remove the EEPROM from the engine PCB or main PCB that has been
removed and then reattach it to the new engine PCB or main PCB.
EEPROM
EEPROM
Figure 1-7-3
1-7-3
2DA/2DB
2-1-1 Paper feed section

The paper feed section conveys paper from the drawer (one drawer is standard for 16 ppm model/two drawers are
standard for 20 ppm model) or bypass tray to the left and right registration rollers, at which point secondary feed takes
place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing.
Drawer can hold up to 300 sheets of paper. Paper is fed from the drawer by the rotation of the forwarding pulley and
paper feed pulley. The separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time, via the torque limiter.
The bypass tray can hold up to 50 sheets of paper. Paper is fed from the bypass tray by the rotation of the bypass paper
feed pulley.
Figure 2-1-1 Paper feed section
1 Separation pulley 0 Bypass paper width switch

2 Forwarding pulley (BYPPWSW)
3 Paper feed pulley ! Drawer paper feed pulley*
4 Bypass paper feed pulley @ Drawer forwarding pulley*
5 Bypass separation pad # Drawer separation pulley*
6 Left registration roller $ Feed roller*
7 Right registration roller % Feed pulley*
8 Drawer lift ^ Drawer lift*
9 Registration switch (RSW) & Drawer feed switch (DFSW)*
*: 20 ppm model only
2-1-1
2DA/2DB
RMPCB EPCB
RM RM
RM YC2-1,2,4,5 YC1-4 YC4-4
RSW
DPCB
RSW RSW
YC5-12 YC1-9 YC8-9
PFCL PFCL
PFCL YC2-1 YC1-15 YC8-3
BYPPFSOL BYPPFCL
BYPPFSOL YC3-2 YC1-13 YC8-5
PSW PSW
PSW YC6-2 YC1-16 YC8-2
BYPPWSW BYPPWSW
BYPPWSW YC5-9 YC1-10 YC8-8
PLSW
PLSW YC22-1,2,4
YC10
YC3
DPFCL
DPFCL* YC8-2
DDM A,B,_A,_B
DDM* YC9-2,3,4,5
DMPCB*
DFSW
DFSW* YC6-2
*: 20 ppm model only
Figure 2-1-2 Paper feed section block diagram
2-1-2
2DA/2DB
Primary feed Secondary feed Primary feed Secondary feed
105 ms 105 ms 250 ms
PFCL
550 ms
1900 ms
430 ms 430 ms
RSW
150 ms 320 ms 150 ms
RM
330 ms
Dev.BIAS
290 ms 290 ms
Separation
charging
100 ms
10 ms 670 ms 10 ms
Transfer
charging
2020 ms
ESW
Timing chart 2-1-1 Paper feed from the drawer (A4, single-sided copy)
a: The paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns on to start primary paper feed.
b: 430 ms after the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns on, the registration switch (RSW) turns on.
c: 105 ms after the registration switch (RSW) turns on, the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns off.
d: 150 ms after the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns on, the registration motor (RM) turns on to start secondary paper
feed.
e: 550 ms after the registration motor (RM) turns on, the paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns off.
f: 1900 ms after the registration motor (RM) turns on, the registration switch (RSW) turns off. At the same time, the
paper feed clutch (PFCL) turns on to start primary paper feed of the second sheet.
g: 320 ms after the registration switch (RSW) turns off, the registration motor (RM) turns off.
2-1-3
2DA/2DB
2-1-2 Optical section

The optical section consists of the scanner, mirror frames and the image scanning unit for scanning and the laser
scanner unit for printing.
Figure 2-1-3 Optical section
1 Mirror 1 frame
2 Mirror 2 frame
3 Exposure lamp (EL)
4 Mirror 1
5 Mirror 2
6 Mirror 3
7 Image scanning unit (ISU)
8 CCD PCB (CCDPCB)
9 Laser scanner unit (LSU)
0 Scanner home position switch
(SHPSW)
! Original detection switch (ODSW)
@ Original size detection sensor (OSDS)
2-1-4
2DA/2DB
(1) Original scanning

The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) in the image
scanning unit via the three mirrors, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.
The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to
side. The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner. When the DP is used, the scanner and mirror
frames stop at the DP original scanning position to start scanning.
Original
YC2-1 INPCB
EL SM
CCDPCB YC2-3 YC1-1,6
EL ON
SM
YC8-1- YC17-1,6 YC16
MPCB YC8-18 -1,2,3,4
YC6-1- YC1-1-
YC6-22 YC1-22
YC7-1-
YC7-7
YC1-1- EPCB
OSDS
YC1-7 YC19-2 OSDS
APCPCB
YC2-2
ODSW
PDN
YC18-5 ODSW
PM
PM YC3-3
PDPCB SHPSW
YC18-2 SHPSW
LSU
Figure 2-1-4 Optional section block diagram
2-1-5
2DA/2DB
(2) Image printing

The image data scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is processed on the main PCB (MPCB) and transmitted as image
printing data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). By repeatedly turning the laser on and off, the laser scanner unit forms a
latent image on the drum surface.
Drum
Figure 2-1-5 Laser scanner unit
1 Laser diode: Generates the laser beam which forms a latent image on the drum.
2 Collimator lens: Collimates the diffused laser beam emitted from the laser diode to convert it into a cylindrical beam.
3 Cylindrical lens: Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution.
4 Polygon mirror: Six-facet mirror that rotates at approximately 23619 rpm with each face reflecting the laser beam
toward the drum for one main-direction scan.
5 Polygon motor: Drives the polygon mirror.
6 Fθ lens: Corrects for non-linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface, keeps the beam diameter
constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam
is on the drum surface.
7 Fθ lens: Corrects for non-linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface, keeps the beam diameter
constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam
is on the drum surface.
8 PD sensor mirror: Reflects the laser beam to the PD sensor to generate the main-direction (horizontal) sync signal.
9 Cylindrical correcting lens: Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam reflected by the PD sensor mirror to the PD
sensor.
0 PD sensor: Detects the beam reflected by the PD sensor mirror, outputting a signal to the main PCB (MPCB) to
provide timing for the main-direction sync signal.
2-1-6
2DA/2DB
The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2-1-6.
Less than 100 µm
Less than 85 µm
Figure 2-1-6
Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror, while scanning in the auxiliary direction is
provided by the rotating drum, forming a static latent image on the drum.
The static latent image of the letter “A”, for example, is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2-1-7. Electrical
charge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser.
The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line, and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other.
Main scanning direction
Auxilary scanning
direction
: laser beam is on
Figure 2-1-7
2-1-7
2DA/2DB
2-1-3 Drum section
The drum section consists of the drum, main charger section, cleaning section and cleaning lamp.
The main charger section consists of main charger wire, main charger grid and main charger shield, and the drum is
charged by a high voltage applied to the main charger wire. In addition, this section is equipped with a manual main
charger cleaner that is used for cleaning the main charger wire.
The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade and cleaning roller that removes residual toner from the drum surface
after the transfer process, and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner box.
The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs which remove residual charge from the drum surface.
Figure 2-1-8 Drum section
1 Drum
2 Main charger unit
3 Main charger wire
4 Drum separation claw
5 Cleaning roller
6 Cleaning spiral
7 Cleaning blade
8 Cleaning lamp (CL)
2-1-8
2DA/2DB
CL
CL YC3-7,8
MC YC1-8 MHVADJC YC9-9
YC1-12 MHVDRN YC9-5

Drum Grid
ZENER
HVTPCB EPCB
PCB
Figure 2-1-9 Drum section block diagram
DM
ESW
100 ms 840 ms
Main
charging
CL
Timing chart 2-1-2 Main charging section operation
a: The drive motor (DM) turns on at the same time, the cleaning lamp (CL) turns on.
b: 100 ms after the drive motor (DM) turns on, main charging starts.
c: 840 ms after the exit switch (ESW) off, main charging is completed.
d: The drive motor (DM) turns off at the same time, the cleaning lamp (CL) turns off.
2-1-9
2DA/2DB
2-1-4 Developing section

The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container.
The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed, the doctor blade and the
developing spirals that agitate the toner.
Also, the toner container sensor (TCS) checks whether or not toner remains in the toner container.
Figure 2-1-10 Developing section
1 Developing unit
2 Developing roller
3 Doctor blade
4 Left developing spiral
5 Right developing spiral
6 Toner container
7 Toner container sensor (TCS)
8 Toner container detection switch
(TCDSW)
2-1-10
2DA/2DB
(1) Formation of magnetic brush

The developing roller consists of a magnet roller with four poles and a sleeve roller. Rotation of the sleeve roller around
the magnet roller entrains toner, which in turn forms a magnetic brush at pole N1 on the magnet roller. The height of the
magnetic brush is regulated by the doctor blade; the developing result is affected by the position of the poles on the
magnet roller and the position of the doctor blade.
A developing bias voltage generated by the high-voltage PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the developing roller to provide
image contrast.
Doctor blade
A S2
94 86
N1 N2
Developing roller
100
S1
N1:870 × 10-4T
A: Distance between the doctor blade and developing roller; 0.3 ± 0.05 mm
N2:400 × 10-4T
S1:725 × 10-4T
S2:910 × 10-4T
Figure 2-1-11 Forming a magnetic brush
Drum HVTPCB
EPCB
DB DB
OFS
OFS YC3-14
TCDSW YC22-5
TCDSW
YC8-10
YC1-8
TCS
TCS YC4-2
DPCB
Figure 2-1-12 Developing section block diagram
2-1-11
2DA/2DB
(2) Single component developing system

This machine uses the single component developing system, and reversal processing is performed with a + charged
drum (a-Si) and a + charged magnetic toner.
With the single component developing system, toner is electrically charged by friction with the developing sleeve and +
charged when it passes through the magnetic doctor blade. The toner that has passed through the magnetic doctor
blade forms a uniform layer on the developing sleeve. When the toner layer comes to the location where the developing
sleeve is the nearest to the drum, toner moves between the drum and the developing sleeve by an electric field of the
magnetic pole. Then, when the developing sleeve rotates and passes through the nearest location to the drum, on the
portion of the drum that has been exposed to light, toner is attracted toward the drum by potential difference between the
developing bias and the drum surface and development is performed. On the other hand, on the portion of the drum that
has not been exposed to light, toner is attracted toward the sleeve and development is not performed. When toner
comes to an area where the gap between the drum and the developing sleeve is large, an electric field disappears and
toner does not leave the developing sleeve. Development is complete.
Magnetic toner blade
Toner
South pole
Drum North pole

Developing sleeve
Figure 2-1-13 Single component developing system
Developing bias parameters

For the bias to the developing sleeve, an alternating
current (AC) is applied. Parameters for the V Duty
developing bias are shown below.
Vp-p: Difference between the maximum and the

minimum of applied voltage
1.6 kV (fixed)
Vf: Frequency
Typically 2.7 kHz. This value varies depending on the
Vo
preset value of the drive time and the environmental
correction. (Can be adjusted with the maintenance Vdc Vp-p
item U101.) VL
Duty: Ratio of time where + voltage is applied in a 0
cycle
Typically 45%. (Can be adjusted with the
maintenance item U101.)
Vdc: Developing shift bias potential 290 V
Supplementation
Vo: Drum surface potential on non-image area (area Vf
not exposed to light)
VL: Drum surface potential on image area (area
exposed to light)
Figure 2-1-14 Developing bias waveformsa
2-1-12
2DA/2DB
2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections

The transfer and separation sections consists of the transfer roller, separation electrode and drum separation claws.
A high voltage generated by the high-voltage PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging.
Paper after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation bias that is output from the high-voltage PCB
(HVTPCB) to the separation electrode.
Figure 2-1-15 Transfer and separation sections
1 Transfer roller
2 Separation electrode
3 Drum separation claw
4 Drum
Separation
SHVISELN electrode
SC
YC9-3 YC1-14
Drum
SHVDRN
YC9-7 YC1-10
THVDRN
YC9-11 YC1-6 Transfer roller
THVADJ TC
YC9-13 YC1-4
MPCB HVTPCB
Figure 2-1-16 Transfer and separation sections block diagram
2-1-13
2DA/2DB
Primary feed Secondary feed Primary feed Secondary feed
105 ms 250 ms 105 ms 250 ms
PFCL
1900 ms
430 ms 430 ms
RSW
150 ms 320 ms 150 ms
RM
330 ms
Dev.BIAS
290 ms
Separation
charging
100 ms
10 ms 670 ms 10 ms
Transfer
charging
2020 ms
ESW
Timing chart 2-1-3 Transfer and separation sections operation
a: 290 ms after the registration motor (RM) turns on to start secondary paper feed, separation charging starts.
b: 10 ms after separation charging starts, transfer charging starts.
c: 670 ms after the registration switch (RSW) turns off, transfer charging ends.
d: 100 ms after transfer charging ends, separation charging ends.
2-1-14
2DA/2DB
2-1-6 Fixing section

The fixing section consists of the parts shown in figure. When paper reaches the fixing section after the transfer process,
it passes between the press roller and heat roller, which is heated by fixing heaters M and S (FH-M/FH-S). Pressure is
applied by the fixing unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted, fused and fixed onto the paper. The
heat roller is heated by fixing heaters M and S (FH-M/FH-S) inside it; its surface temperature is detected by the fixing
thermistor (FTH) and is regulated by the fixing heaters turning on and off.
If the fixing section becomes abnormally hot, fixing thermostat (FTS) operates shutting the power to the fixing heaters off.
When the fixing process is completed, the paper is separated from the heat roller by its separation claws and is
conveyed from the MFP to exit and switchback section.
1 Left fixing unit

2 Right fixing unit
3 Press roller
4 Heat roller
5 Fixing heater M (FH-M)
6 Fixing heater S (FH-S)
7 Heat roller separation claw
8 Fixing thermostat (FTS)
Figure 2-1-17 Fixing section
Heat roller
FTS YC6-1
PSPCB
FH-M YC6-2
LIVE
FH-S YC6-3
AC
FTH
COM
YC2-8
YC2-7
FH-M
FH-S
FTH
YC21-7
YC21-8
CN3-12
EPCB
Figure 2-1-18 Fixing section block diagram
2-1-15
2DA/2DB-1
(1) Fixing temperature system
Temperature
(°C)
Preset temperature (°C)

(secondary stabilization)
Warm-up Ready state Time

control control
500 ms
HEAT signal On Off On Off On Fixing heater S (FH-S)
HEAT signal Off Off Fixing heater M (FH-M)

On On On
Figure 2-1-19 Fixing temperature system
• Warm-up control
1. 500 ms after the fixing heater S (FH-S) turns on, the fixing heater M (FH-M) turns on.
2. When the fixing temperature reaches preset temperature, both fixing heater S (FH-S) and fixing heater M (FH-M) turn off
simultaneously.
• Ready state control

1. When the fixing temperature drops to the preset temperature, fixing heater S (FH-S) turns on, and after specified time, the
heater turns off.
2. When fixing heater S (FH-S) turns off, fixing heater M (FH-M) turns on at the same time, and after specified time, the heater
turns off.
3. The operation above is repeated to keep the fixing temperature to the preset temperature.
* If a temperature more than or equal to the preset temperature + 20°C/68°F is detected, both fixing heater S (FH-S) and
fixing heater M (FH-M) are turned off forcibly.
(2) Fixing temperature control based on ambient temperature

This machine performs fixing temperature control based on the ambient temperature.
Ambient temperature Fixing temperature (°C)

Lower than 13°C/55.4°F Reference value +10
Higher than or equal to 13°C/55.4°F, Reference value +5
lower than 18°C/64.4°F
Higher than or equal to 18°C/64.4°F, Reference value
lower than 31°C/87.8°F
Higher than 31°C/87.8°F Reference value -5
2-1-16
2DA/2DB
2-1-7 Exit and switchback sections
The exit and switchback sections exit paper on which fixing has ended with the exit roller that is rotated by forward
rotation of the exit motor.
In duplex copying, paper is turned over by reverse rotation of the exit motor.
1 Feedshift guide
2 Exit roller
3 Exit pulley
4 Feedshift guide
5 Switchback roller
6 Switchback pulley
7 Exit switch (ESW)
8 Feedshift switch (FSSW)
Figure 2-1-20 Exit and switchback sections
EM
EM YC14-1,2,3,4
ESW
ESW YC15-2
FSSW EPCB
FSSW YC15-3
Figure 2-1-21 Exit and switchback sections block diagram
2-1-17
2DA/2DB
2-1-8 Duplex section
In duplex mode, after copying on to the reverse face of the paper, the paper is reversed in the switchback section and
conveyed to the duplex unit. The paper is then conveyed to the MFP paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex
feed rollers.
1 Duplex feed pulley

2 Upper duplex feed roller
3 Duplex feed pulley
4 Lower duplex feed roller
5 Duplex paper conveying switch
(DPPCSW)
Figure 2-1-22 Duplex section
DPCB EPCB
DUPPCSW YC5-5 YC1-11 DUPPCSW YC8-7

DUPPCSW
DUPFCL DUPFCL
DUPFCL YC5-8 YC1-12 YC8-6
Figure 2-1-23 Duplex section block diagram
2-1-18
2DA/2DB
(1) Paper conveying operation in duplex copying

Paper of which copying onto the reverse side is complete is conveyed to the switchback section, the exit motor switches
from forward rotation to reverse rotation to switch the exit roller to reverse rotation, and the paper conveying direction is
reversed. Paper that has been switched back is conveyed to the duplex unit via the exit roller and the switchback roller.
Paper that has been conveyed to the duplex unit is conveyed to the paper feed section again by rotation of the upper
duplex feed roller and the lower duplex feed roller and copying onto the front side is performed.
Exit roller Switchback roller Exit roller Exit roller
Upper duplex
feed roller
Lower duplex
feed roller
Copying onto reverse side Switchback operation Copying onto front side
(forward rotation of exit motor) (reverse rotation of exit motor) (forward rotation of exit motor)
Paper path
Figure 2-1-24
2-1-19
2DA/2DB
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout
(1) PCBs
5
6
7 13
9
10
2
12
4 3
11
;
8
14
15
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 PCBs
1. Engine PCB (EPCB) .................................... Controls the other PCBs, electrical components and optional devices.
2. Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls the operation panel and laser scanner unit.
3. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ....................... Generates +24 V DC and 5V DC; controls the fixing heater.
4. High-voltage PCB (HVTPCB) ...................... Main charging. Generates high voltages for transfer and high voltages
for separation.
5. Inverter PCB (INPCB) .................................. Controls the exposure lamp.
6. CCD PCB (CCDPCB) .................................. Reads the image off originals.
7. Operation unit PCB (OPCB) ........................ Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs.
8. Drawer PCB (DPCB) ................................... Controls the electrical components.
9. APC PCB (APCPCB) ................................... Generates and controls the laser light.
10. PD PCB (PDPCB) ........................................ Controls horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam.
11. Registration motor PCB (RMPCB) ............... Controls the registration motor.
12. Printer board PCB (PRNPCB) ..................... Controls the printer functions.
13. LCD PCB (LCDPCB) ................................... Controls the display of LCD.
14. Drawer main PCB (DMPCB)*1 ............................ Controls electrical components of the drawer.
15. Drawer heater PCB (DHPCB)*1 ......................... Relays the drawer heater power.
*1: Optional for 16 ppm model./Standard for 20 ppm model.
2-2-1
2DA/2DB
(2) Switches and sensors
9
8 10
12
3 13
17
23
16 1
15
11
14
;
4
7
6 5
20
18
19
21 22
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors
1. Power switch (POWSW) .............................. Turns the AC power on and off.

2. Front cover safety switch (FCSSW) ............. Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened.
3. Left cover safety switch (LCSSW) ............... Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover is opened.
4. Paper switch (PSW) ..................................... Detects the presence of paper in the drawer.
5. Paper size length switch (PLSW) ................ Detects the length of paper in the drawer.
6. Paper size width switch (PWSW) ................ Detects the width of paper in the drawer.
7. Bypass paper size width switch
(BYPPWSW) ................................................ Detects the width of paper on the bypass tray.
8. Scanner home position switch (SHPSW) .... Detects the optical system in the home position.
9. Original detection switch (ODSW) ............... Operates the original size detection sensor.
10. Original size detection sensor (OSDS) ........ Detects the size of the original.
11. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing.
12. Exit switch (ESW) ........................................ Detects a paper misfeed in the fixing section.
13. Feedshift switch (FSSW) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback section in a duplex copy.
14. Toner container sensor (TCS) ...................... Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container.
15. Toner container detection switch
(TCDSW) ..................................................... Detects the presence of the toner container.
16. Overflow sensor (OFS) ................................ Detects when the waste toner box is full.
17. Fixing thermistor (FTH) ................................ Detects the heat roller temperature.
18. Drawer left cover safety switch
(DLCSSW)*1 ................................................................ Breaks the safety circuit when the drawer left cover is opened.
2-2-2
2DA/2DB
19. Drawer feed switch (DFSW)*1 ............................. Detects a paper misfeed.

20. Drawer paper switch (DPSW)*1 .......................... Detects the presence of paper in the drawer.
21. Drawer paper size width switch
(DPWSW)*1 .................................................................. Detects the width of paper in the drawer.
22. Drawer paper size length switch
(DPLSW)*1 .................................................................... Detects the length of paper in the drawer.
23. Duplex paper conveying switch
(DUPPCSW)*2 ............................................................ Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex unit.

*2: Optional.
2-2-3
2DA/2DB
(3) Motors
3
4
6
5
1
7
Machine front ;
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
Machine inside
1. Drive motor (DM) ......................................... Drives the machine.

2. Scanner motor (SM) .................................... Drives the optical system.
3. Exit motor (EM) ............................................ Drives the exit section.
Machine rear
4. Cooling fan motor 1 (CFM1) ........................ Cools the machine interior.

7. Polygon motor (PM) ..................................... Drives the polygon mirror.
8. Registration motor (RM) ............................... Drives the registration roller.
9. Drawer drive motor (DDM)*1 ................................ Drives the drawer section.
2-2-4
2DA/2DB-1
(4) Other electrical components
6
7
5
11
2 8
1
;
10
9
Figure 2-2-4 Other electrical components
1. Paper feed clutch (PFCL) ............................ Primary paper feed from the drawer.
2. Bypass paper feed solenoid (BYPPFSOL) .. Primary paper feed from the bypass tray.
3. Exposure lamp (EL) ..................................... Exposes originals.
4. Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the drum surface.
5. Fixing heater M (FH-M) ................................ Heats the heat roller.
6. Fixing heater S (FH-S) ................................. Heats the heat roller.
7. Fixing thermostat (FTS) ............................... Prevents overheating in the fixing section.
8. Drawer heater (DH)*2 .............................................. Dehumidifies the drawer section.
9. Drawer heater (DH)*2 .............................................. Dehumidifies the drawer section.
10. Drawer paper feed clutch (DPFCL)*1 ............... Primary paper feed from the drawer.
11. Duplex feed clutch (DUPFCL)*2 ......................... Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller.

*2: Optional.
2-2-5
2DA/2DB-1
2-3-1 Power source PCB
CN1 Power switch T1

F1 L1
L2 D101
24 V DC +24V
AC D1 output Q151
circuit +24V1
INPUT Q2 C101 D111
C104 D110
C5 GND
Energy D206
save Energy +5V
control 5 V DC save
circuit output control
F3 F2 C102 circuit circuit
Q1 Q153 SLEPN
L3 C105 IC101 Q154
L4 Switching
control circuit GND
Rectifier circuit
DH1.LIVE D109 5 V DC
D104 3-terminal
DH1.OUT PC4 regulator +24V2
D33 D30
PC5 Overvoltage (IC301)
detection circuit
PC1 +5V1
DH2.LIVE AC Zero-cross circuit
detection PC3 Zero-cross
output circuit ZCROSSC
DH2.OUT circuit
Fixing heater PC2 SHEATN

ON/OFF circuit
(TRA1,TR201) PC201 MHEATN
Fixing heater
SH.OUT
control circuit
H.LIVE
MH.OUT
Figure 2-3-1 Power source PCB block diagram
The power source PCB (PSPCB) is a switching regulator that converts an AC input to generate 24 V DC and 5 V DC. It
includes a rectifier circuit, a switching regulator circuit, a 24 V DC output circuit, a 5 V DC output circuit, overvoltage
detection circuit, zero-cross circuit and a fixing heater control circuit.
The rectifier circuit full-wave rectifies the AC input using the diode bridge D1. The smoothing capacitor (C5) smoothes out
the pulsed current from the diode bridge.
In the switching control circuit, switching circuit turns the power MOSFET (Q1) on and off to switch the voltage induced in
the primary coil of the transformer (T1).
The 5 V DC output circuit rectifies and smoothes the voltage induced in the secondary coil of the transformer (T1) via diodes
(D102) and smoothing capacitors (C102, C105), and the output is controlled by the overvoltage detection circuit (IC101).
For 5 V DC output, the switching circuit of the switching control circuit changes the duty of the switching pulse width of the
power MOSFET (Q1) via a photo coupler (PC1) based on the output voltage status to adjust the 5 V DC output.
The 24 V DC output circuit rectifies and smoothes the voltage induced in the secondary coil of the transformer (T1) via
diodes (D101) and smoothing capacitors (C101, C104), and the output is controlled by the overvoltage detection circuit
(IC101).
The zero-cross circuit detects zero-crossing of the AC input voltage with the AC detection circuit and outputs the zero-cross
signal (ZCROSSC) from the zero-cross output circuit through the photo coupler (PC3).
The fixing heater control circuit is divided into the sub-heater output (SH.OUT) and the main heater output (MH.OUT). When
the control signals (SHEATN and MHEATN) input from the machine engine side show a low level, this circuit turns on the
sub-heater and the main heater respectively by turning on the photo triac couplers (PC2 and PC201) with a zero-cross
circuit to turn on the triacs (TRA1 and TR201) in the fixing heater ON/OFF circuit.
The power-saving control circuit performs power-saving control by turning off the 24 V DC output in the 24 V DC output ON/
OFF switching circuit and controlling the switching control circuit and the AC detection circuit through the photo coupler
(PC4) to decrease the switching frequency, stop the starting circuit in the switching control circuit, and stop the AC detection
circuit when the sleep signal (SLEPN) input from the machine engine side is low.
In addition, 5 V DC 3-terminal regulator (IC102) is connected to the back of the 24 V DC output ON/OFF switching circuit to
output +5 V1, and this output stops when the sleep signal (SLEPN) is low.
2-3-1
2DA/2DB-1
220-240 V AC
120 V AC
Figure 2-3-2 Power source PCB silk-screen diagram
2-3-2
2DA/2DB-1
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Description

CN1 1 AC-L I AC supply (LIVE)
Connected 2 FG - Ground
to the AC 3 AC-N I AC supply (NEUTRAL)
power plug
YC1 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC power supply for LCSSW

Connected 2 NC - Not used
to the 3 +24V2 I 24 V DC power supply (Via LCSSW)
engine PCB 4 +24V4 O 24 V DC power supply for EPCB (Via LCSSW)
and left 5 PGND - Ground
cover safety 6 SGND - Ground
switch 7 +5V O 5 V DC power supply for EPCB
YC2 1 +5V O 5 V DC power supply for EPCB (Via FCSSW)

Connected 2 SGND - Ground
to the 3 +24V2 O 24 V DC power supply (Via LCSSW)
engine PCB 4 SGND - Ground
5 ZCROSSC O Zero-cross signal
6 SLEPN I Power source sleep signal
7 SHEATN I FH-S on/off
8 MHEATN I FH-M on/off
9 COUNTN I Counter control signal
10 PGND - Ground
11 PGND - Ground
12 +24V1 O 24 V DC power supply for EPCB
13 +24V1 O 24 V DC power supply for EPCB
14 +24V O 24 V DC power supply for EPCB
YC5 1 +5V1 O 5 V DC power supply for FCSSW

to the front 3 +5V3 I 5 V DC power supply
cover
safety
switch
YC6 1 H.LIVE O AC power supply for FH-M/S (LIVE)

Connected 2 MH.OUT O AC power supply for FH-M
to the fixing 3 SH.OUT O AC power supply for FH-S
heater M/S
YC7 1 DH2.LIVE O AC power supply for drawer heater of the paper feeder (LIVE)
to the paper 3 NC - Not used
feeder*1 4 DH2.OUT O AC power supply for drawer heater of the paper feeder
YC8 1 DH1.LIVE O AC power supply for drawer heater (LIVE)

to the 3 NC - Not used
drawer 4 DH1.OUT O AC power supply for drawer heater
heater*2
YC9 1 +24V4 O 24 V DC power supply for paper feeder

Connected 2 PGND - Ground
to the paper
feeder*1
*1: Optional for 16 ppm model. Standard for 20 ppm model. *2: Optional.
2-3-3
2DA/2DB-1
2-3-2 Main PCB
Main PCB
IICSCL EEPROM
IICSDA (U39)
Operation
PCB IICSCL RTC
IICSDA (U40)
LCD
LCD
controller
PCB
(U17) Serial I/O
Data bus
Address bus
XIO
8bit (U49)
AFE
Analog (U3) Work
CCD memory
PCB (U54)
ADCLK
CCDCLK1-2 (U57)
Buffer
PVSYNC Program
OVSYNC memory
Flash
ROM
Image memory Image data (U23)
SDRAM
Printer CPU
(YS1,YS2)
Engine board Code data (U56)
(YC12)
PCB PCB
Memory 33 MHz
VIDEO_PRT_N copy
LVDS VIDEO_PRT_P ASIC Codec IC
(U20) (U19)
PLGCLK
8bit
8bit Network
scanner
Polygon
motor
Image
processing
OUTPEN ASIC
BDN (U7)
SAMPLEN
APC
PCB LDOP
LDON
+5VAPC
Q1
BDFAIL0
Q2
Figure 2-3-3 Main PCB block diagram
The main PCB (MPCB) consists of mainly CPU (U56), program memory flash ROM (U23), work memory SDRAMs (U54,
U57), XIO (U49), image processing ASIC (U7), memory copy ASIC (U20), codec IC (U19), AFE (U3), LCD controller (U17),
EEPROM (U39), and RTC (U40).
2-3-4
2DA/2DB-1
YC6 YC2 18 YC1

YC5 2
12
2 16 2 10 17 1
11 7
5
1 15 1 1
YC7
YC3
13 1
B49 B1
YC13
1
B50 B2
A49 A1
A50 A2
YC12
1
2
YC16
19
20
25 50
YC9
1 26
4 YS3 72
2 70
3 71
1 69 YS2
50 2
49 1
100 52
99 51
50 2 YS1
49 1
YC10
100 52
20
19
99 51
1
2
YC11
19
20
2
1
YS8 YS15
A1 A19
13 1 A2 A20
14 2 B1 B19
B2 B20
Figure 2-3-4 Main PCB silk-screen diagram
2-3-5
2DA/2DB-1

YC1 1 CCDO I CCDPCB image scanning signal
Connected 2 CCDON - Ground
to the CCD 3 CCDE I CCDPCB image scanning signal
PCB 4 CCDEN - Ground
5 +5V O 5 V DC power supply for CCDPCB
6 SGND - Ground
7 +12V O +12 V DC power supply for CCDPCB
8 SGND - Ground
9 CCDCLK O CCDCLK signal
10 SGND - Ground
11 CCDCLKN O CCDCLKN signal
12 SGND - Ground
13 RS O CCDPCB RS signal
14 SGND - Ground
15 CP O CCDPCB CP signal
16 SGND - Ground
17 SH O CCDPCB SH signal
18 SGND - Ground
YC2 1 PDN I Laser sync signal

to the APC 3 OUTPEN O Laser diode output signal
PCB 4 SAMPLEN O Laser light signal
5 VDON O Image differential signal (negative)
6 VDOP O Image differential signal (positive)
7 +5V1 O 5 V DC power supply for APCPCB
YC5 1 SCAN7N O Key switch scan signal 7

Connected 2 SCAN6N O Key switch scan signal 6
to the 3 SCAN5N O Key switch scan signal 5
operation 4 SCAN4N O Key switch scan signal 4
unit PCB 5 SCAN3N O Key switch scan signal 3
6 SCAN2N O Key switch scan signal 2
9 BUZERDRN O OPCB buzzer signal
10 +5V O 5 V DC power supply for OPCB
11 SGND - Ground
YC6 1 POWERKEYN I Power key operating signal input

Connected 2 LED0 O LED lighting selection signal 0
to the 3 LED1 O LED lighting selection signal 1
operation 4 LED2 O LED lighting selection signal 2
unit PCB 5 LED3 O LED lighting selection signal 3
6 LED4 O LED lighting selection signal 4
7 KEY9 I Key switch return signal 9
2-3-6
2DA/2DB-1

YC7 1 +5VSLEEP O 5 V DC power supply from LCDPCB
Connected 2 -12V O -12 V DC power supply from LCDPCB
to the LCD 3 LCDUD3 O LCD display data signal
PCB 4 LCDUD2 O LCD display data signal
5 LCDUD1 O LCD display data signal
6 LCDUD0 O LCD display data signal
7 LCDCP O LCD display control signal
8 LCDFLM O LCD display control signal
9 LCDENB O LCD display control signal
10 LCDLP O LCD display control signal
11 LCDVO O LCD display control signal
12 SGND - Ground
13 LCDGND - Ground
YC10 1 +24V I 24 V DC power supply from PRNPCB

to the 3 +12VCCD I 24 V DC power supply from PRNPCB
printer 4 E2CSGND - Ground
board PCB 5 E2CRSTN I Reset signal
6 E2CEGIRN I Engine communication E2CEGIRN signal
7 PDMASKN I Printing image interval signal
8 E2CEGSO I Engine serial communication reception
9 E2CSCKN O Engine communication clock signal
10 +5V I 5 V DC power supply from PRNPCB
11 E2CEGSI O Engine serial communication transmission
13 E2CSBSYN I Engine communication E2CSBSYN signal
14 +3.3V I 3.3 V DC power supply from PRNPCB
15 E2CSDIR I Engine communication E2CSDIR signal
16 PLGCLK O PM clock signal
17 OUTEPN I Laser diode output signal
18 PVSYNC I Printing image interval signal
19 OVSYNC I Original scanning interval signal
20 +5VAPC I 5 V DC power supply from PRNPCB
YC11 1 SGND - Ground

Connected 2 C2PW_UP_PRTN I C2PW_UP_PRTN signal
to the 3 SGND - Ground
printer 4 C2PW_RST_PRTN O C2PW_RST_PRTN signal
board PCB 5 SGND - Ground
6 C2PEGIRN O Engine communication C2PEGIRN signal
7 C2PEGSO O Engine serial communication transmission
9 C2PSCKN I Engine communication clock signal
11 C2PEGSI O Engine serial communication reception
13 C2SBSYN O Engine communication C2SBSYN signal
14 +3.3V I 3.3 V DC power supply from PRNPCB
15 C2PSDIR O Engine communication E2CSDIR signal
16 PRBDN O Laser sync signal
17 SGND - Ground
18 C2PVIDEO_PRN_N I C2PVIDEO_PRN_N signal
19 C2PVIDEO_PRN_P I C2PVIDEO_PRN_P signal
20 SGND - Ground
2-3-7
2DA/2DB-1
2-3-3 Engine PCB
HVTPCB INPCB
MHEATN
Fixing SHEATN MHVDR LAMPN
unit THVDR
24V1
24V4
SLEPN SHVDR
THERMA SHVISEL 5V DP
ZCROSSC HVCLK ORGTIM
(DB)
DOPSEL,DOPRDY
CL
ERASER1N MHVIADJ DOPSI,DOPSO
ERASER2N THVIADJ
24V4 DOPSCLK
PSPCB 24V1 5V
ISU TONEEPY Scanner unit

TONEFUL OPSWN
5V ORGLSWN 5V2 CCDPCB
HPSWN 5V2
Finisher/ UOPSEL
Job UOPRDY
UOPSDO 12V
separator UOPSDI ISMDA
SCLK ISMDNB 5V
SLSOLN ISMDNA
RLSOLN 24V1
24V4 5V4 ISMDB
ISU
TEMP
HUMIDC SCAN0-7
HMCLK1 +12V
OPPCB BUZERDRN
HMCLK2 LED0-4 -12V
5V2
KEY0-9
Duplex LCDUD0-3 5V
unit ICLTN EPCB LCDPCB LCDCP
IPPSWN LCDFLM 3.3V
24V4 LCDENB 2.5V
LCDLP
1.8V
LCDVO
CFM1,2,3 FAN1DRN 2.5V 5V
FAN2DRN 1.8V 3.3V SBSY
FAN3DRN SDIR
24V1 EGIRN
RSTN CPU
PFCL EGSO
BYPPFCL FCLTN
BSOLN SCKN
24V1 EGSI
PRNPCB
REM MPCB
DM
RDY PDMASKN
CLK OVSYNK ASIC
24V4 5V OUTPEN
PLGCLK
RSW REGSWN
ESW EXTSWN
FSSW SEPSWN
5V2
Paper feeder
BYPPWSW PLSW RM LOPSDO LSU
PWSW LOPSDI
BPWSW C1PLSW1N RMLOW LOPSCLK PLGCLK OUTPEN
BPPESW C1PLSW2N RMCLK PLGDRN VDOP
C1PLSW3N RMENB LOPSRDY PLGRDYN VDON
C1PWSWN PDN
C1PDSW LOPSEL0 SAMPLEN
24V4 LOPSEL1 24V1
LOPSEL2 5V3
5V2 5V2 5V 5V2 24V4
Figure 2-3-5 Engine PCB block diagram
2-3-8
2DA/2DB-1
YC16 6 YC17 1 1 3 YC18

1 6
1 4 YC19 1 YC6 12
1
U13
YC5
5
YC4
U10 U9 U8
13
1
1
YC15
1
YC12
4
2
U6
1
1
YC14
U15
4
U12
7
1
U1
YC1
X1
YC2
YC3
15
1
1
YC13
22
YC7
1
1
YC23
7
1
YC11
U11
9
1
2
YC21
U16
14
4 YC20 1
U7
2
YC24
1
YC10
1 YC8 17 6 YC22 1 1 YC9 16

11
Figure 2-3-6 Engine PCB silk-screen diagram
2-3-9
2DA/2DB-1

YC1 1 +12V O +12 V DC power supply for MPCB
Connected 2 OVSYNC O Original scanning interval signal
to the 3 RSTN O Reset signal
printer 4 EGRN O Engine communication EGRN signal
board PCB 5 SDIR O Engine communication SDIR signal
6 SBSY O Engine communication SBSY signal
7 PDMASKN O Printing image interval signal
8 EGSI I Engine serial communication reception
9 SCKN I Engine communication clock signal
10 EGSO O Engine serial communication transmission
11 PLGCLK I PM clock signal
12 SGND - Ground
13 OUTEPN O Laser diode output signal
14 +5V O 5 V DC power supply for MPCB
17 SGND - Ground
18 SGND - Ground
19 SGND - Ground
20 +5V1 O 5 V DC power supply for PRNPCB
21 PGND - Ground
22 +24V O 24 V DC power supply for PRNPCB
YC3 1 PLGCLKN O PM clock signal

Connected 2 PLGRDYN I PM rotation sync signal
to the 3 PLGDRN O PM on/off
polygon 4 PLGGND - Ground
motor, 5 PLG+24V4 O 24 V DC power supply for PM
cleaning 6 ERASE+24V4 O 24 V DC power supply for CL
lamp, 7 ERASE2N O CL on/off (2)
cooling fan 8 ERASE1N O CL on/off (1)
motor 1, 9 FAN1DRN O CFM1 on/off
fixing 10 +24V1 O 24 V DC power supply for CFM1
thermister 11 THERMA+5V O 5 V DC power supply for FTH
and 12 THERMA I FTH analog signal
overflow 13 TONEGND - Ground
sensor 14 TONEFUL I OFS on/off
15 TONE+5V2 O 5 V DC power supply for OFS
YC4 1 +5V O 5 V DC power supply for RM

Connected 2 RMLOW O RM Low signal
to the 3 RMCLK O RM clock signal
registration 4 RMENB O RM on/off
motor PCB 5 SGND - Ground
YC5 1 RLSOLN I Finisher/Job separator FSSW (RET) on/off

Connected 2 SLSOLN I Finisher/Job separator FSSW (ACT) on/off
to the 3 SCLK O Finisher/Job separator clock signal
finisher*2/ 4 SDI I Finisher serial communication reception/ Job separator JBESW on/off
job 5 SDO O Finisher/Job separator serial communication transmission
separator*2 6 OPRDY I Finisher READY signal/ Job separator EPDSW on/off
7 OPSEL O Finisher SELECT signal
8 SGND - Ground
9 +5V4 O 5 V DC power supply for Finisher/Job separator
10 PGND - Ground
11 PGND - Ground
2-3-10
2DA/2DB-1

YC6 1 ORGTIMN I DP original scanning interval signal
Connected 2 DOPRDY I DP READY signal
to the DP*2 3 DOPSEL O DP SELECT signal
4 SGND - Ground
5 DOPCLK O DP clock signal
6 DOPSDI I DP serial communication reception
7 DOPSDO O DP serial communication transmission
8 +5V4 O 5 V DC power supply for DP
9 PGND - Ground
10 PGND - Ground
YC7 1 +24V4 O 24 V DC power supply for DM

to the drive 3 SGND - Ground
motor 4 +5V O 5 V DC power supply for DM
5 REM O DM on/off
6 RDY I DM rotation sync signal
7 CLK O DM clock signal
YC8 1 BPPESW I BYPPSW on/off

Connected 2 C1PDSWN I PSW on/off
to the 3 FCLTN O PFCL on/off
drawer 4 +24V1 O 24 V DC power supply for DPCB
PCB 5 BPSOLN O BYPPFCL on/off
6 ICLTN O DUPFCL on/off
7 IPPSWN I DUPPCSW on/off
8 BPWSW I BYPPWSW on/off
9 REGSWN I RSW on/off
10 TONEPY I TCS on/off
11 SGND - Ground
12 +5V2 O 5 V DC power supply for DPCB
13 C1PWSWN I PWSW on/off
14 HUMIDC I HUMSENS analog signal
15 HMCLK2 O HUMSENS clock signal (2)
16 HMCLK1 O HUMSENS clock signal (1)
17 TEMP I HUMSENS analog signal
YC9 1 HVCLK O Developing bias clock signal

Connected 2 +5V O 5 V DC power supply for HVTPCB
to the high- 3 SHVISELN O Separation high-voltage switch signal
voltage 4 PGND - Ground
PCB 5 MHVDRN O Main charging high-voltage on/off
6 PGND - Ground
7 SHVDRN O Separation high-voltage on/off
8 PGND - Ground
9 MHVADJ O Main charging high-voltage adjust signal
10 PGND - Ground
11 THVDRN O Transfer high-voltage on/off
12 +24V4 O 24 V DC power supply for HVTPCB
13 THVADJ O Transfer high-voltage adjust signal
15 PGND - Ground
2-3-11
2DA/2DB-1

YC10 1 LOPSRDY I Paper feeder READY signal
Connected 2 LOPSEL2 O Paper feeder SEL2 signal
to the 3 LOPSEL1 O Paper feeder SEL1 signal
paper 4 LOPSEL0 O Paper feeder SEL0 signal
feeder*1 5 LOPSCLK O Paper feeder clock signal
6 LOPSDI I Paper feeder serial communication reception
7 LOPSDO O Paper feeder serial communication transmission
8 SGND - Ground
9 +5V2 O 5 V DC power supply for the paper feeder
10 SGND - Ground
11 +5V2 O 5 V DC power supply for the paper feeder
YC11 1 +24V4 O 24 V DC power supply for CFM2

Connected 2 FAN2DRN O CFM2 on/off
to the
cooling fan
motor 2
YC12 1 +24V4 O 24 V DC power supply for CFM3

Connected 2 FAN3DRN O CFM3 on/off
to the
cooling fan
motor 3
YC13 1 +24V1 O 24 V DC power supply for key counter

Connected 2 KEYCN O Key counter count signal
to the key 3 SGND - Ground
counter*2 4 KEYENBN I Key counter set signal
YC14 1 COMDA O EM control signal (A)

Connected 2 COMDNB O EM control signal (_B)
to the exit 3 COMDNA O EM control signal (_A)
motor 4 COMDB O EM control signal (B)
YC15 1 PGND - Ground

Connect to 2 EXTSMN I ESW on/off
the exit 3 SEPSWN I FSSW on/off
switch and 4 +5V2 O 5 V DC power supply for ESW/FSSW
feedshift
switch
YC16 1 ISMDA O SM control signal (A)

Connected 2 ISMDNB O SM control signal (_B)
to the 3 ISMDNA O SM control signal (_A)
scanner 4 ISMDB O SM control signal (B)
motor
YC17 1 LAMPN O EL on/off

to the 3 +24V1 O 24 V DC power supply for inverter PCB
inverter 4 +24V1 O 24 V DC power supply for inverter PCB
PCB 5 PGND - Ground
6 LAMPN O EL on/off
2-3-12
2DA/2DB-1

YC18 1 +5V2 O 5 V DC power supply for SHPSW
Connected 2 HPSWN I SHPSW on/off
original 4 +5V2 O 5 V DC power supply for ODSW
detection 5 OPSWN I ODSW on/off
switch and 6 SGND - Ground
scanner
home
position
switch
YC19 1 +5V2 O 5 V DC power supply for OSDS

Connected 2 ORGLSWN I OSDS on/off
original size
detection
sensor
YC20 1 +5 V I 5 V DC power supply from PSPCB

to the 3 PGND - Ground
power 4 +24V4 I 24 V DC power supply from PSPCB (Via LCSSW)
source PCB
YC21 1 +24V I 24 V DC power supply from PSPCB

Connected 2 +24V1 I 24 V DC power supply from PSPCB
to the 3 +24V1 I 24 V DC power supply from PSPCB
power 4 PGND - Ground
source PCB 5 PGND - Ground
6 COUNTN - Not used
7 MHEATN O FH-M on/off
8 SHEATN O FH-S on/off
9 SLEPN O Power source sleep signal
10 ZCROSSC O Zero-cross signal
11 SGND - Ground
12 +24V2 I 24 V DC power supply from PSPCB (Via LCSSW)
13 SGND - Ground
14 +5V3 I 24 V DC power supply from PSPCB (Via LCSSW)
YC22 1 C1PLSW3N I PLSW on/off

Connected 2 C1PLSW2N I PLSW on/off
to the paper 3 SGND - Ground
size length 4 C1PLSW1N I PLSW on/off
switch and 5 TCONDET I TCDSW on/off
toner 6 SGND - Ground
container
detection
switch
YC24 1 +24V4 O 24 V DC power supply for RMPCB

to the
registration
motor PCB
2-3-13
2DA/2DB-1
2-3-4 Printer board PCB

FSDM, VALIDH
YC4 FSDP
DATA+, USBCLK, LINESTATE0-1, U6, U8, U10, U12
DATA- TXREADY, RXERROR, Local data bus LD31-0
HSDM, buffer
USB I/F
HSDP RXVALID, RXACTIVE

U25
USBRST, SUSPENDM, CPUD31-0
USB2.0
TERMSELECT, XCVRSELECT,
PHY
TXVALID CPUA31-0 CPUA31-0 U1
Q2 Q3 PPC750CXr
USBD15-0 RSTOUTN
Digital U7, U9, U11
XIN LA22-2
transistor X’tal (USB)
XOUT X3 Buffer
48.0 MHz
USBINT
USBVBUS YC2
TX_CLK, RX_ER, RX_CLK, CDET1A, CDET2A, CFWAITN1 U20, U21
RX_DV, COL, CRS, PHY_IRN Option CFD15-0 LD15-0
YC5 CFCS1LN, CFCS1HN,
Buffer
memory
TX_EN, MDC CFOEN1, CFWEN1, CFRST1
card
TXOP, TXON MDIO slot
LA20,11-2 Buffer CFA20,11-2
Local address bus

U26 TX_D3-0
Network I/F
Ether
PHY RX_D3-0 U22,U23 YC1
RXIP, RXIN
LA22-2 LA20,11-2
RSTOUTN Option LD15-0
XIN hard
Digital X’tal (Ether)
X4 CDET2A, CDET2B, CFWAITN2 disk
transistor XOUT 25.0 MHz slot
LEDN CFCS2LN,CFCS2HN, CFOEN2, CFWEN2, CFRST2
YC3 Q4
YS1
LA22-5
PNSELIN NSELIN
PNSTROBE, U24 NSTROBE, System
ROMA4-2 LD31-0
PNAUTOFD, PNINIT NAUTOFD, NINIT DIMM
Parallel I/F
CSN0-1, FCLE, FALE, OEN0, WEN0, NANDCSN, RSTOUTN slot

transceiver
Centronics
PNACK, PBUSY, NACK,BUSY, (Code ROM)

PPERROR PERROR FRB
U3
PSELECT, PFAULT SELECT, FAULT
ASIC
ROMA1 U13
PPDATA7-0 PDATA7-0 Font
CSN2, OEN1
mask LD15-0
LA22-2 ROM
YC11 P1284DIR U14
ROMA1
RTS, DTR, TXD
Serial I/F
OEN1 LD15-0
CTS, DSR, RXD
CNS3 API ROM
RSSEL Decoder
LA22 socket
U15
LA20-2
YC8
YC12
OPRSTN1
Connect to engine PCB
C2PBDN, C2PSDIR, C2PSBSY KUIOCSN1, OPRDY1,

Option I/f
C2PEGSI, C2PSCKN DMAACK1N,IOR1N, IOW1N
KUIO-LV (3.3 V)
C2PVIDEO_PRT_P, C2PVIDEO_PRT_N IODTACKN1, OPIR1N, DMAREQ1
C2PRST_PRTN LA16-2 LD15-0
C2PW_UP_PRTN
SDCLK1-2
U5
DQMN3, DQMN2
Option
X’tal (System) DQMN1, DQMN0
SSCG SDRAM
X1 SDRASN, SDCASN, SDWEN, SDBA1, SDBA0, SDCLKE
YC6 25.0000 MHz DIMM
IICSCL socket
Connect to engine PCB
IICSDA
E2COVSYNC, E2CPVSYNC, E2CSCLKN SDCSN2-3
SDD31-0
E2CEGSI, E2CRSTN, E2CPLGCLK SDA12-0 SDRAM address bus
VXIN
E2CSDIR, E2CSBSY, X2 VXOUT
E2CEGSO, E2CEGIRN
SDA12-0 YS2
SDD31-16
E2COUTPEN
X’tal (Video) U18
Buffer
19.858061 MHz SDCLK0 SDRAM
U27
YC7 SDCSN0
Connect to main PCB
3.3V-2.5V regulator
+3.3V +2.5V
U33
U19
SDD15-0
SDRAM
SDA12-0
3.3V-1.8V regulator +3.3V regulator circuit
+3.3V +1.8V +5VCONV +3.3 V

U34 U32
SDRAM data bus SDD31-0 SDD31-0
Figure 2-3-7 Printer board PCB block diagram
2-3-14
2DA/2DB-1
2 16
1 15
YC10
B2
B1
A2
A1
1
26
YC12
YC1
1
25
50
B30
B29
A30
A29
YC6
22
36
18
5
YC9
YC3
1
10
YC11
19
1
1
YS2 99
100
1
49
26
72 50
YS1 70
YC2
71
69
25
50
Figure 2-3-8 Printer board PCB silk-screen diagram
2-3-15
2DA/2DB-1

YC6
1 +12V I +12 V DC power supply from EPCB
Connected 2 OVSYNC I Original scanning interval signal
to the 3 RSTN I Reset signal
engine PCB 4 EGRN I Engine communication EGRN signal
5 SDIR I Engine communication SDIR signal
6 SBSY I Engine communication SBSY signal
7 PDMASKN I Printing image interval signal
8 EGSI O Engine serial communication transmission
9 SCKN O Engine communication clock signal
10 EGSO I Engine serial communication reception
11 PLGCLK O PM clock signal
12 SGND - Ground
13 OUTEPN I Laser diode output signal
14 +5V I 5 V DC power supply from EPCB
17 SGND - Ground
18 SGND - Ground
19 SGND - Ground
20 +5V1 I 5 V DC power supply from EPCB
21 PGND - Ground
YC7 1 +24V O 24 V DC power supply for MPCB

to the main 3 +12VCCD O +12 V DC power supply for MPCB
PCB 4 E2CSGND - Ground
5 E2CRSTN O Reset signal
6 E2CEGIRN O Engine communication E2CEGIRN signal
7 PDMASKN O Printing image interval signal
8 E2CEGSO O Engine serial communication transmission
9 E2CSCKN I Engine communication clock signal
11 E2CEGSI I Engine serial communication reception
13 E2CSBSYN O Engine communication E2CSBSYN signal
14 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC power supply for MPCB
15 E2CSDIR O Engine communication E2CSDIR signal
16 PLGCLK I PM clock signal
17 OUTEPN O Laser diode output signal
18 PVSYNC O Printing image interval signal
19 OVSYNC O Original scanning interval signal
20 +5VAPC O 5 V DC power supply for MPCB
2-3-16
2DA/2DB-1

YC8 1 SGND - Ground
Connected 2 C2PW_UP_PRTN O C2PW_UP_PRTN signal
to the main 3 SGND - Ground
PCB 4 C2PW_RST_PRTN I C2PW_RST_PRTN signal
5 SGND - Ground
6 C2PEGIRN I Engine communication C2PEGIRN signal
7 C2PEGSO I Engine serial communication reception
9 C2PSCKN O Engine communication clock signal
11 C2PEGSI I Engine serial communication transmission
13 C2SBSYN I Engine communication C2SBSYN signal
14 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC power supply from PRNPCB
15 C2PSDIR I Engine communication E2CSDIR signal
16 PRBDN I Laser sync signal
17 SGND - Ground
18 C2PVIDEO_PRN_N O C2PVIDEO_PRN_N signal
19 C2PVIDEO_PRN_P O C2PVIDEO_PRN_P signal
20 SGND - Ground
2-3-17
2DA/2DB-1
2-3-5 Operation unit PCB

K69
K67 K63 K49 K39
K66 K62 K48 K38 K29 K21 K17
K65 K51 K47 K37 K28 K20 K16 K40
K64 K59 K46 K36 K27 K19 K11 K34
K60 K58 K45 K35 K26 K18 K10 K5
K56 K57 K44 K33 K25 K15 K9 K4
K52 K55 K43 K32 K24 K14 K8 K3
+5V K51 K54 K42 K31 K23 K13 K7 K2
BZ1 K50 K53 K41 K30 K22 K12 K6 K1
SGND
YC1
SGND 1 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
+5V 2
BUZERDRN 3
SCAN0 4
SCAN1 5
SCAN2 6
SCAN3 7
SCAN4 8
SCAN5 9
SCAN6 10
SCAN7 11
YC2
KEY0 12
KEY1 3
KEY2 4
L35 L1 L25 L20 L14 L10 L1
KEY3 5
KEY4 6
KEY5 7
KEY6 8 L41
KEY7 9
KEY8 10
KEY9 11
LED4
L36 L31 L26 L21 L15 L11 L6 L2
LED3
LED2
LED1
LED0 L42
POWERKEY
L37 L32 L27 L22 L16 L12 L7 L3

K68
L43
+5V L38 L33 L28 L23 L17 L13 L6 L4
SGND R1
L40 L39 L34 L29 L24 L18 L19 L9 L5
SGND
Figure 2-3-9 Operation unit PCB block diagram
The operation unit PCB (OPPCB) consists of key switches, LEDs and buzzer. The lighting of LEDs is determined by scan
signals (SCAN0 to SCAN7) and LED lighting selection signals (LED0 to LED4) from the main PCB (MPCB). The key
switches operated are identified by the scan signals (SCAN0 to SCAN7) and the return signals (KEY0 to KEY9).
As an example, to light L1, the LED lighting selection signal (LED4) should be driven low in synchronization with a low level
on the scan signal (SCAN0). LEDs can be lit dynamically by repeating such operations.
As another example, if K1 is pressed, the corresponding key switch is turned on feeding the low level of the scan signal
(SCAN0) back to the main PCB (MPCB) via the return signal (KEY9). The main PCB (MPCB) locates the position where the
line outputting the scan signal and the line inputting the return signal cross, and thereby determines which key switch was
operated.
2-3-18
2DA/2DB-1
Figure 2-3-10 Operation unit PCB silk-screen diagram
2-3-19
2DA/2DB-1

YC1 1 SGND - Ground
Connected 2 +5V I 5 V DC power supply from MPCB
to the main 3 BUZERDRN I OPCB buzzer signal
PCB 4 SCAN0N I Key switch scan signal 0
5 SCAN1N I Key switch scan signal 1
YC2 1 KEY0 O Key switch return signal 0

Connected 2 KEY1 O Key switch return signal 1
to the main 3 KEY2 O Key switch return signal 2
PCB 4 KEY3 O Key switch return signal 3
5 KEY4 O Key switch return signal 4
11 LED4 I LED lighting selection signal 4
16 POWERKEYN O Power key operating output signal
2-3-20
2DA/2DB-1
2-3-6 CCD PCB
CCDPCB
Tr.AMP
CCD sensor
U2
Driver MPCB
U1
U3
Figure 2-3-11 CCD PCB block diagram
The CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is equipped with a CCD sensor (U2) for original scanning.
The clock signals for driving the CCD sensor (U2) are sent from the main PCB (MPCB), and then input to the CCD sensor
(U2) via the clock drivers (U1 and U3).
Image signals are analog signals. Even- and odd-numbered pixels are output separately. These analog image signals are
amplified in the transistors (TR1 to 4) and then transmitted to the analog signal processing circuit in the main PCB (MPCB).
2-3-21
2DA/2DB-1
U2
YC1
U3 U1
U4
Figure 2-3-12 CCD PCB silk-screen diagram

YC1 1 SGND - Ground
Connected 2 SH I MPCB SH signal
to the main 3 SGND - Ground
PCB 4 CP I MPCB CP signal
5 SGND - Ground
6 RS I MPCB RS signal
7 SGND - Ground
8 CCDCLKN I CCDCLKN signal
9 SGND - Ground
10 CCDCLK I CCDCLK signal
11 SGND - Ground
12 +12V I +12 V DC power supply from MPCB
13 SGND - Ground
14 +5V I 5 V DC power supply from MPCB
15 CCDEN - Ground
16 CCDE O CCDPCB image scanning signal
17 CCDON - Ground
18 CCDO O CCDPCB image scanning signal
2-3-22
Timing chart No. 1 Paper feed from drawer, single-side mode, original size A4/11" × 81/2", two sheets
Primary feed 105 ms Scondary feed 250 ms Primary feed 105 ms Scondary feed 250 ms
PFCL YC8-3
1810 ms (20 ppm model)

430 ms 430 ms
RSW YC8-9
320 ms 150 ms
150 ms
RM YC4-4
330 ms
Dev.BIAS
290 ms 290 ms
Separation
charging YC9-7
100 ms
10 ms 670 ms 10 ms
Transfer
charging YC9-11
2020 ms
ESW YC15-2
2DA/2DB
2-4-1
Timing chart No. 2 Paper feed from drawer, single-side mode, original size A3/11" × 17", two sheets
2-4-2
2DA/2DB
Primary feed 120 ms Scondary feed 1100 ms Primary feed 120 ms Scondary feed 1100 ms
PFCL YC8-3

2700 ms (16 ppm model) 2700 ms
434 ms 434 ms
RSW YC8-9
320 ms 320 ms
RM YC4-4
330 ms 330 ms
Dev.BIAS
290 ms 290 ms
Separation
charging YC9-7
100 ms 100 ms
10 ms 670 ms 10 ms 670 ms
Transfer
charging YC9-11
2015 ms 1800 ms
ESW YC15-2
Timing chart No. 3 Paper feed from first paper feeder (optional for 16 ppm model/standard for 20 ppm model), single-side mode,
original size A4/11" × 81/2", two sheets
Primary feed 200 ms Scondary feed Primary feed 200 ms Scondary feed
DPFCL1 YC8-2
DDM1 YC9-2,3,
4,5
1740 ms 1740 ms
RSW YC8-9
150 ms 290 ms 150 ms
RM YC4-4
290 ms 290 ms
Separation
charging YC9-7
100 ms
10 ms 670 ms 10 ms
Transfer
charging YC9-11
2220 ms
ESW YC15-2
2DA/2DB
2-4-3
Timing chart No. 4 Paper feed from second paper feeder (optional), single-side mode, original size A4/11" × 81/2", two sheets
2-4-4
2DA/2DB
Primary feed 200 ms Scondary feed Primary feed 200 ms Scondary feed
DPFCL2 YC8-2
DDM2 YC9-2,3,
4,5
1420 ms 1420 ms
DFSW1 YC6-2
DDM1 YC9-2,3,
4,5
1370 ms 1370 ms
RSW YC8-9
150 ms 290 ms 150 ms
RM YC4-4
290 ms 100 ms 290 ms
Separation
charging YC9-7
10 ms 670 ms 10 ms
Transfer
charging YC9-11
2220 ms
ESW YC15-2
Chart of image adjustment procedures
Adjust- Maintenance mode
ing Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
order Item No. Display
Adjusting the magnification Polygon motor speed adjustment U053 POLY U053 test 1-4-13
in the main scanning di- pattern
1 rection (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the magnification Drive motor speed adjustment U053 MAIN U053 test 1-4-13
in the auxiliary scanning di- pattern
2 rection (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the center line of Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU BYP U034 test 1-6-18
the bypass tray (printing pattern
3 adjustment)
Adjusting the center line of Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU OUT U034 test 1-6-18 First paper feeder: select LSU T1
the drawers (printing adjust- pattern Second paper feeder: select LSU T2
4 ment) Third paper feeder: select LSU T3
Duplex copying: select LSU DUP
Adjusting the leading edge Registration motor turning on timing U034 RCL BYP U034 test 1-6-16
registration of the bypass (secondary paper feed start timing) pattern
5 tray (printing adjustment)
Adjusting the leading edge Registration motor turning on timing U034 RCL ON U034 test 1-6-16 First paper feeder: select RCL T1
registration of the drawer (secondary paper feed start timing) pattern Second paper feeder: select RCL T2
6 (printing adjustment) Third paper feeder: select RCL T3
Duplex copying: select RCL DUP
Adjusting the leading edge LSU illumination start timing U402 LEAD U402 test 1-6-20
margin (printing adjustment) pattern
7
Adjusting the trailing edge LSU illumination end timing U402 TRAIL U402 test 1-6-20
margin (printing adjustment) pattern
8
2DA/2DB
2-4-5
Adjust- Maintenance mode
ing Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
2-4-6
order Item No. Display
2DA/2DB
Adjusting the left and right LSU illumination start/end timing U402 AC U402 test 1-6-20
margins (printing adjust- pattern
9 ment)
Adjusting magnification of Data processing U065 MAIN SCAN Test chart 1-6-33 No adjustment for copying using
the scanner in the main ADJ the DP.
0 scanning direction
(scanning adjustment)
Adjusting magnification of Original scanning speed U065 SUB SCAN Test chart 1-6-34 U065: For copying an original
the scanner in the auxiliary U070 ADJ 1-4-16 placed on the contact glass.
! scanning direction U070: For copying originals from
(scanning adjustment) the DP.
Adjusting the center line Adjusting the original scan data (image U067 ––– Test chart 1-6-36 U067: For copying an original
(scanning adjustment) adjustment) U072 ––– 1-4-18 placed on the contact glass.
@ U072: For copying originals from
the DP.
Adjusting the leading edge Original scan start timing U066 ––– Test chart 1-6-35 U066: For copying an original
registration (scanning ad- U071 ––– 1-4-17 placed on the contact glass.
# justment) U071: For copying originals from
the DP.
Adjusting the leading edge Adjusting the original scan data (image U403 B MARGIN Test chart 1-6-37 U403: For copying an original
margin (scanning adjust- adjustment) U404 B MARGIN 1-4-44 placed on the contact glass.
$ ment) U404: For copying originals from
the DP.
Adjusting the trailing edge Adjusting the original scan data (image U403 D MARGIN Test chart 1-6-37 U403: For copying an original
margin (scanning adjust- adjustment) U404 D MARGIN 1-4-44 placed on the contact glass.
% ment) U404: For copying originals from
the DP.
Adjusting the left and right Adjusting the original scan data (image U403 A/C MARGIN Test chart 1-6-37 U403: For copying an original
margins (scanning adjust- adjustment) U404 A/C MARGIN placed on the contact glass.
^ ment) 1-4-44 U404: For copying originals from
the DP.
When maintenance item U092 (Adjusting the scanner automatically) is run using the specified original (P/N 2A068020), the following adjustments are automatically made:
• Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
• Adjusting the scanner magnification in the main scanning direction (U065)
• Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
• Adjusting the scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction (U065)
When maintenance item U076 (Adjusting the DP automatically) is run using the specified original (P/N 2AC68241), the following adjustments are automatically made:
• Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)
• Adjusting the DP scanning timing (U071)
• Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
Image quality
Item Specifications
100% magnification Copier: ±0.8%
Using DP: ±1.5%
Enlargement/reduction Copier: ±1.0%
Using DP: ±1.5%
Lateral squareness Copier: ±1.5 mm/375 mm
Using DP: ±3.0 mm/375 mm
Margins A: 3.0± 2.5 mm
B: 3.0 ± 2.5 mm
C: 3.0± 2.5 mm
D: 3.0 ± 2.5mm
Leading edge registration Drawer: ±2.5 mm
Bypass: ±2.5 mm
Duplex copying: ±2.5 mm
Skewed paper feed (left-right difference) Drawer: 1.5 mm or less
Bypass: 1.5 mm or less
Duplex copying: 2.0 mm or less
Lateral image shifting Drawer: ±2.0 mm
Bypass: ±2.0 mm
Duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
2DA/2DB
2-4-7
2DA/2DB
Maintenance parts list
Maintenance part name

Part No. Fig. No. Ref. No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
Paper feed pulley PULLEY, PAPER FEED 2AR07220 7 39
Separation pulley PULLEY, SEPARATION 2AR07230 7 40
Forwarding pulley PULLEY, LEADING FEED 2AR07240 7 41
Drawer paper feed pulley PULLEY, PAPER FEED 2AR07220 4 16
Drawer separation pulley PULLEY, SEPARATION 2AR07230 4 17
Drawer forwarding pulley PULLEY, LEADING FEED 2AR07240 4 18
Bypass paper feed pulley PARTS, BYPASS PULLEY, SP 2C993130 8 19
Bypass separation pad PARTS, BYPASS PAD, SP 2C993140 8 15
Left registration roller ROLLER REGIST LEFT 2C916020 6 1
Right registration roller RIGHT ROLL REGIST 2C907180 7 9
Registration cleaner PARTS, REGIST CLEANER, ASSY 2C993210 7 27
Trans guide film FILM RIGHT TRANS A 2C917220 7 28
Feed roller ROLLER FEED 3HW06020 4 3
Feed pulley PULLEY FEED 2BL16080 3 24
Slit glass CONTACT GLASS ADF 2C912280 10 27
Contact glass CONTACT GLASS 2C912250 10 24
Mirror 1 MIRROR A 2C912390 10 37
Mirror 2 and mirror 3 MIRROR B 2AV12160 10 4
Lens LENS 2C912500 – –
Reflector REFLECTOR SCANNER 2C912110 10 12
Exposure lamp LAMP SCANNER YG 2C912090 10 10
Front scanner rail FRONT RAIL SCANNER 2C912070 – –
Rear scanner rail REAR RAIL SCANNER 2C912080 – –
Original size detection sensor SENSOR ORIGINAL 2C912090 10 55
Transfer roller ROLLER TRANSFER 2C917010 6 21
Separation electrode PLATE STA ELIMINATION 2C917080 6 28
Developing unit PARTS, DV-410, SP 2C993030 11 1
Drum unit SET, MK-410 2C982010 11 5
Fixing unit PARTS, FK-410(A), SP 2C993051 12 –
Fixing unit PARTS, FK-410(E), SP 2C993061 12 –
Heat roller ROLLER HEAT 2C920050 12 5
Press roller ROLLER PRESS 2C920060 12 6
Heat roller separation claw SEPARATOR ASSY 2BR20240 12 24
Exit roller ROLLER EXIT INNER 2C921010 9 17
Exit pulley PULLEY EJECT 2C921360 9 46
Switchback roller ROLLER FEED SHIFT 2C921020 9 18
Switchback pulley PULLEY FEED SHIFT 2C921040 9 19
2-4-8
2DA/2DB
Periodic maintenance procedures
Maintenance
Section Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
part/location
Test copy and Perform at the maximum Test copy Every service
test print copy size
Maintenance
part/location
Paper feed Paper feed pulley Clean or replace - Clean with the alcohol. 1-6-5
section
Separation pulley Clean or replace - Clean with the alcohol. 1-6-3
Forwarding pulley Clean or replace - Clean with the alcohol. 1-6-5
Drawer paper feed pulley Clean or replace - Clean with the alcohol. 1-6-9
Drawer separation pulley Clean or replace - Clean with the alcohol. 1-6-8
Drawer forwarding pulley Clean or replace - Clean with the alcohol. 1-6-9
Bypass paper feed pulley Clean or replace - Clean with the alcohol. 1-6-13
Bypass separation pad Clean or replace - Clean with the alcohol. 1-6-13
Left registration roller Clean or replace Every 150,000 counts Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-15
Right registration roller Clean Every 150,000 counts Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Registration cleaner Clean or replace Every 150,000 counts Vacuum. 1-6-15
Trans guide film Check or replace -
Feed roller Clean or replace - Clean with the alcohol. 1-6-7
Feed pulley Check or replace - Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Maintenance
part/location
Optical section Slit glass Clean Every 150,000 counts Clean with alcohol and then
a dry cloth.
Contact glass Clean Every 150,000 counts Clean with alcohol and then
a dry cloth.
Mirror 1 Clean - Clean with alcohol and then a dry
cloth only if vertical black lines
appear on the copy image.
Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Clean - Clean with alcohol and then a dry
Lens Clean - Clean with alcohol and then a dry
Reflector Clean - Clean with alcohol and then a dry
Exposure lamp Clean or replace - Replace if an image problem 1-6-22
occurs or after the exposure
lamp does not turn on.
Optical rail Grease - Check noise and shifting and
then apply scanner rail grease
EM-50E.
Original size detection Clean - Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
sensor
2-4-9
2DA/2DB-1
Maintenance
part/location
Transfer and Transfer roller Clean - Vaccum or clean with a dry cloth. 1-6-42
separation Separation electrode Check or clean - Clean with the equipped brush.
section
Maintenance
part/location
Developing Developing unit Check or replace - Replace if the problem occurs. 1-6-41
section
Maintenance
part/location
Drum section Drum unit Check or replace Every 150,000 counts Replace if the problem occurs. 1-6-38
Maintenance
part/location
Fixing section Fixing unit Check or replace - Replace if the problem occurs. 1-6-43
Heat roller Clean Every 150,000 counts Clean with alcohol. 1-6-48
Press roller Clean Every 150,000 counts Clean with alcohol. 1-6-45
Heat roller separation Clean or replace Every 150,000 counts Clean with alcohol. Replace if it 1-6-47
claw is being lacking, deformed or
rubbing.
Maintenance
part/location
Exit section Exit roller Check or clean - Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Exit pulley Check or clean - Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Switchback roller Check or clean - Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Switchback pulley Check or clean - Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Maintenance
part/location
Covers Covers Clean Every 150,000 counts Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Maintenance
part/location
Other Image quality Check and adjust Every service
2-4-10
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
LAMP
LCDPCB OPTION 1
INPCB N.C.
CCDPCB KMAS 2 EL
-12V
(ONLY JAPAN) CFM3 SM LAMP
SGND
3
LCDV0
LCDLP
LCDCP
1/2
3/4
5/6
1 LCDGND
2
3
4
5 LCDENB
6 LCDFLM
7
8 LCDVD0
9 LCDVD1
1/2
3/4
5/6
7/8
9/10
11/12
13/14
15/16
17/18
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10 LCDVD2
11 LCDVD3
12
13 +5VSLEEP
A
A
General wiring diagram
2
1
1
2
1
2
3
4
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
13
12
11
10
6/5
4/3
2/1
8/7
6/5
4/3
2/1
YC19
YC12
YC16
YC17
10/9
YC8
YC13
18/17
16/15
14/13
12/11
WE
NC 2
SGND 3 1 3 3
+5V 11
+5V 12
YC7
+24V1
WE OSDS
ISMDA
ISMDB
SGND 6
SGND 8
SGND 9
SGND 10
YC2 YC5 ORGLSWN 2 2 2 2
KMDET 1
KMTXD 7
KMACK 4
ISMDNB
ISMDNA
KMRXD 5
WE
FAN3DRN
BK
KMDREQ 3
SGND/SH
SGND/CP
SGND/RS
+5V2 1 3 1 1
SGND/+5V
SGND/+12V
11/10 1/2 SCAN7N/SCAN6N
CCDEN/CCDE
YC6
CCDON/CCDO
SGND/CCDCLK
9/8 3/4
SGND/CCDCLKN
SCAN5N/SCAN4N
+24V1/+24V1
WE
LAMPN/PGND
PGND/LAMPN
+5V4 8 8 8 16
7/6 5/6 SCAN3N/SCAN2N WE
2/1
4/3
6/5
8/7
2/1
4/3
6/5
8/7
MPCB SGND 4 4 15 15
10/9
10/9
5/4 7/8 SCAN1N/SCAN0N
12/11
14/13
16/15
18/17
20/19
12/11
14/13
16/15
18/17
20/19
YC11
YC10
WE 7 14
B
B
3/2 9/10 BUZERDRN/+5V

WE 14 13
1 11 SGND
DOPSDI 6 6 WE 6 12
OPCB WE Document
7/8
5/6
3/4
1/2
7/8
5/6
3/4
1/2
YC1
YC8
YC7
YC6 DOPSDO 7 7 13 11
9/10
9/10
GY Processor
19/20
17/18
15/16
13/14
11/12
19/20
17/18
15/16
13/14
11/12
DOPCLK 5 5 WE 5 10
16/15 1/2 POWER KEYN/LED0 EPCB (OPTION)
DOPSEL 3 3 WE 12 9
14/13 3/4 LED1/LED2
DOPRDY 2 2 WE 4 8
12/11 5/6 LED3/LED4 YC6 YC1
ORGTIMN 1 1 WE 11 7
10/9 7/8 KEY9N/KEY8N 22/21 22/21 +24V/PGND
KUIO
8/7 9/10 KEY7N/KEY6N 20/19 20/19 +5V3/SGND 3 6
(OPTION)
PGND 9 9 WE 10 5
6/5 11/12 KEY5N/KEY4N 18/17 18/17 SGND/SGND
WE
YC12
4/3 13/14 KEY3N/KEY2N 16/15 16/15 +5V/+5V PGND 10 10 2 4
+24V1 11 11 WE 9 3
YC1
2/1 15/16 KEY1N/KEY0N 14/13 14/13 +5V/OUTEPN
+24V1 12 12 WE 1 2
12/11 12/11 SGND/PLGCLK
YC5
PRNPCB
10/9 10/9 EGSO/SCKN S 1
C
C
Ether net
Hard Disk
(OPTION)
8/7 8/7 EGSI/PDMASKN YC18
6/5 6/5 SBSY/SDIR
+5V3
VDOP
VDON
SAMPLEN
OUTPEN
SGND
PDN
GND 6 1 GY 3 3
4/3 4/3 EGRN/RSTN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
YC2
GY
YC4
USB
OPSWN 5 2 2 2 ODSW
2/1 2/1 OVSYNC/+12V GY
+5V2 4 3 1 1
LB
PK
BE
OE
GY
GN
YW
GND 3 4 GY 3 3
YC3
HPSWN 2 5 GY 2 2 SHPSW
GY
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+5V2 1 6 1 1
Parallel I/F
YC1
PDPCB YC1
YC4
GY YC2
+5V3
PDN
SGND
APCPCB +5V 1 5 1 7
GY _B 1 5
YC2
RMLOW 2 4 2 6
3
2
1
3
2
1
D
D
RMCLK 3 3 GY 3 5 _A 2 4
YC3
1
2
3
1
2
3
RMENB 4 2 GY 4 4 COM 3 3 RM
1 5 WE 1 5 GY 1 PLGCLKN
SGND 5 1 GY 5 3 B 4 2
WE WE GY
2 4 2 4 2 PLGRDYN A 5 1
WE WE GY
LSU PM 3 3 3 3 3 PLGDRN YC24
WE WE GY
4 2 4 2 4 PLGGND
WE GY +24V4 1 2 GY 6 2 RMPCB
5 1 5 1 5 PLG+24V4
PGND 2 1 GY 7 1
3R RD 1 3 GY 6 ERASE+24V4
CL BK 2 2 GY 7 ERASE2N YC15
1G GN 3 1 GY 8 ERASE1N +5V2 4 BK 1 +5V
SEPSWN 3 BK 2 OUT1 ESW
1 2 GY 9 FAN1DRN EXTSWN 2 BK 3 OUT2 FSSW
CFM1 GY BK
2 1 10 +24V1 GND 1 4 GND
E
E
1 2 GY 11 THERMA+5V YC14
2 1 GY 12 THERMA COMDA 4
COMDNB 3 EM
B BK 1 3 GY 13 TONEGND COMDNA 2
OFS W WE 2 2 GY 14 TONEFUL COMDA 1
R RDWE 3 1 GY 15 TONE+5V2
YC13
YC7
1 1 +24V1 GY
KEY COUNTER +24V4 1 1
2 2 KEYCN GY
OR KEY CARD PGND 2 2
3 3 SGND GY
(OPTION) SGND 3 3
4 4 KEYENBN GY
+5V 4 4 DM
YC2 YC21 REM 5 GY 5
F
F
GY RDY 6 GY 6
+24V 14 1 +24V
GY CLK 7 GY 7
+24V1 13 2 +24V1
+24V1 12 GY 3 +24V1 YC11
PGND 11 GY 4 PGND
FCSSW YC5 +24V1 1 2
PGND 10 GY 5 PGND CFM2
OE FAN2DRN 2 1
1 +5V1 GY
COUNTN 9 6 COUNTN
2 NC GY
FTH OE MHEATN 8 7 MHEATN YC5
3 +5V3 GY
SHEATN 7 8 SHEATN +24V4 13
FH-S GY
YC6 SLEPN 6 9 SLEPN +24V4/PGND 12/11
WE WE GY Finisher
3 3 SH.OUT ZCROSSC 5 10 ZCROSSC PGND/+5V4 10/9
GY or Job Separator
SGND 4 11 SGND SGND/UOPSEL 8/7
WE WE GY (OPTION)
2 2 MH.OUT +24V2 3 12 +24V2 UOPRDY/UOPSD0 6/5
PSPCB GY
FH-M SGND 2 13 SGND UOPSD1/SCLK 4/3
BK BK GY
1 1 H.LIVE +5V3 1 14 +5V3 SLSOLN/RLSOLN 2/1
G
G
YC1 YC20
FTS
OR YC9 YC1
+5V 7 1 +5V
BE +24V4/RCLTN 16/15 1/2 +24V4/RCLTN
SGND 6 2 SGND
BE +24V4/THVADJ 14/13 3/4 +24V4/THVADJ
PGND 5 3 PGND
POWSW RD +24V4/THVDRN 12/11 5/6 +24V4/THVDRN
+24V4 4 4 +24V4
AC IN RD PGND/MHVADJC 10/9 7/8 PGND/MHVADJC
+24V2 3
YC10 PGND/SHVDRN 8/7 9/10 PGND/SHVDRN
NC 2
LIVE RD 11 +5V2 PGND/MHVDRN 6/5 11/12 PGND/MHVDRN
+24V1 1
FGND 10 SGND PGND/SHVISELN 4/3 13/14 PGND/HVISELN HVTPCB
COM LCSSW 9 +5V2 +5V/HVCLKC 2/1 15/16 +5V/HVCLKC
8 SGND YC22
7 LOPSDO C1PLSW3N 1 BK 4
6 LOPSDI YC8 C1PLSW2N 2 BK 3 ZENER PCB
H
H
5 LOPSCLK BK PLSW
1
2 NC
3 NC
4
1
2 NC
3 NC
4
1 +24V1
2 PGND
SGND 3 2
YC8
YC7
YC9
4 LOPSEL0 C1PLSW1N 4 BK 1
3 LOPSEL1
BPPE SW
C1PDSWN
FCLTN
+24V1
BPSOLN
ICLTN
IPPSWN
BPWSW
REGSWN
TONEPY
SGND
+5V2
C1PWSWN
HUMIDC
HMCLK2
HMCLK1
TEMP
2 LOPSEL2 TCONDET 5 BK 2
1 LOPSRDY BK TCDSW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
SGND 6 1
1
2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
WE
DH DUPLEX UNIT
YC1
YC5 KR KR XR CT 1 1
BK
BE
RD
(OPTION)
WE
(OPTION)
+5V2 1 13 1 3 1 1 BYP 2 2
1 NC
2 NC
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BYPPCSW
BPSWN 2 12 2 2 2 2 PSW 3 3
SGND 3 11 31 3 3
1
2
3
4
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
KR GY
I
I
+5V2 4 10 1 5 DUPFCL
IPPSWN 5 9 GY 2 4
FIRST PAPER FEEDER GY
(16 ppm: OPTION/20 ppm: STANDARD) SGND 6 8 3 3
+24V4 7 7 GY 4 2 1 1
ICLTN 8 6 GY 5 1 2 2
SECOND PAPER FEEDER (OPTION)
DPCB GY
BPWSW 9 5 1 2 BYPPWSW
THIRD PAPER FEEDER (OPTION) GY
+5V2 10 4 2 1
GY
YC6 +5V2 11 3 1 1
GY RSW
WE REGSWN 12 2 2 2
1 1 3 3 +5V2 GY
WE SGND 13 1 3 3
PSW 2 2 2 2 C1PDSWN
WE YC2
3 3 1 1 SGND
J
J
YC4 FCLTN 1
PFCL
B BK 1 3 SGND +24V1 2
W WE 2 2 TONEPY YC3
TCS
R RDWE 3 1 +5V2 +24V1 1
BYPPFSOL
BSOLN 2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2-4-11
2DA/2DB-1

Service Manual: Published in Aug '04 2DA70761 Revision 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: Published in Aug '04 2DA70761 Revision 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: Published in Aug '04 2DA70761 Revision 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

KM-1650/2050

Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action.

General action required.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................

1-2 Handling Precautions

1-4 Maintenance Mode

(4) Background is visible. ................................................................................................................... 1-5-28

1-6 Assembly and Disassembly

1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement

2-1 Mechanical construction

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-3 Operation of the PCBs

Type ............................................... Desktop

Additional memory ......................... 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB and 128 MB

1-1-2 Parts names and their functions

1 Original cover 0 Support guide ( Front cover

(2) Operation panel

1-1-3 Machine cross section

Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section

1 Paper feed section

1-1-4 Drive system

1 Drive motor gear % Developing gear 25

1-2-3 Installation environment

1. Temperature: 10 - 32.5°C/50 - 90.5°F

Figure 1-2-1 Installation dimensions

1-3-1 Unpacking and installation

(1) Installation procedure

Install the optional paper feeder.

Installing the toner

Output an own-status report

Install the optional finisher or job separator. Exit maintenance mode.

Install the toner container. Make test copies.

Connect the power cord. End of installation.

Figure 1-3-1a Unpacking

1 MFP 0 Left spacer ( Original holder

* Place the machine on a level surface.

Figure 1-3-1b Unpacking

1 MFP 0 Left spacer ( Original holder

* Place the machine on a level surface.

Install the optional paper feeder.

Remove the tapes and pins.

16 ppm model Tape

20 ppm model Tape

2. Remove the two pins for light source unit. Pins

Install the original cover or optional DP.

Install the optional duplex unit.

Install the optional finisher or job separator.

Install the toner container.

Connect the power cord.

Installing the toner (maintenance item U130).

Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000).

Exit maintenance mode.